Перевод: с греческого на английский

с английского на греческий

С английского на:
Греческий
С греческого на:
Английский

through+position

Толкование Перевод

1 μέσος

μέσος, η, ον (Hom.+). The distinction between ‘middle’ and ‘among’ for μ. is sometimes rather fluid, and some of the passages here cited may fit equally well under 1 or 2.

① pert. to a middle position spatially or temporally, middle, in the middle.

ⓐ as adj. (of intermediate terms: Pla., Rep. 330b, Pol. 303a) ὁ μέσος αὐτῶν ἀνήρ the man in their midst, apparently surrounded by them Hs 9, 12, 7. μέσης νυκτός at midnight (3 Km 3:20.—B-D-F §270, 2; Rob. 495; Lobeck, Phryn. p. 53; 54; 465) Mt 25:6. ἡμέρας μέσης at midday (Jos., Bell. 1, 651, Ant. 17, 155) Ac 26:13. εἰς μέσην τὴν οἰκοδομήν into the middle of the building Hs 9, 7, 5; cp. 9, 8, 2; 4; 6 (cp. Philo, Fuga 49 εἰς μέσον τὸν ποταμόν; Jos., Ant. 4, 80 εἰς μέσον τὸ πῦρ). ἐσταύρωσαν … μέσον τὸν Ἰησοῦν they crucified Jesus between (them) J 19:18. ἐσχίσθη τὸ καταπέτασμα μέσον the curtain was torn in two Lk 23:45 (cp. Artem. 4, 30 τὸ ἱμάτιον μέσον ἐρρωγέναι). ἐλάκησεν μέσος Ac 1:18 (cp. Aristoph., Ran. 955). ἐν μέσοις τοῖς ὀργάνοις τοῦ διαβόλου in the midst of the tools of the devil 2 Cl 18:2 (for the syntax cp. Gen 2:9 ἐν μέσῳ τῷ παραδείσῳ).

ⓑ as subst. neut. τὸ μ. the middle (on the absence of the art. s. B-D-F §264, 4; cp. Rob. 792) ἀνὰ μέσον τινός (s. ἀνά 1) ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν ὁρίων within or through the region Mk 7:31. ἀνὰ μ. αὐτῶν between them GPt 4:10; Hs 9, 2, 3; 9, 15, 2. ἀνὰ μ. ἐκκλησίας ἁγίων B 6:16; 4:10; διακρῖναι ἀνὰ μ. τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ between one (congregation) member and another 1 Cor 6:5 (s. ἀνά 1b. Perh. μέσος prompted a shortening of the sentence tending to obscurity; cp. the Stoic expr. μέσα καθήκοντα = καθήκοντα ἃ ἐν μέσῳ ἐστὶ κατορθωμάτων κ. ἁμαρτημάτων: MPohlenz, D. Stoa II ’49, 73f). τὸ ἀρνίον τὸ ἀ. μ. τοῦ θρόνου the lamb who is (seated) on the center of the throne Rv 7:17. ἀνὰ μ. τῆς ὁδοῦ (they made) half their journey GJs 17:3.—διὰ μέσου αὐτῶν through the midst of them (X., An. 1, 4, 4; Aesop. Fab. 147 P.=247 H./201a Ch./152 [I, II] H-H.; Am 5:17; Jer 44:4; Jdth 11:19; 1 Macc 5:46; Ath. 18, 3 ‘between’) Lk 4:30; J 8:59 v.l. διὰ μέσον Σαμαρείας καὶ Γαλιλαίας Lk 17:11 prob. can only mean through Samaria and Galilee; but this raises a practical difficulty, since we should expect to find the provinces mentioned in the opposite order. Perh. the text is damaged (cp. the vv.ll. διὰ μέσου and μέσον; s. B-D-F §222; Rob. 648; JBlinzler, AWikenhauser Festschr. ’54, 46ff. If the v.l. διὰ μέσου Σ. καὶ Γ. should be correct, we could compare Maximus Tyr. 28, 4a διὰ μέσου πίστεως κ. ἀπιστίας=throughout between). For the view that μέσον signifies the area betw. S. and G. s. the comm. Cp. δια B1.—εἰς τὸ μέσον into the middle or center (X., Cyr. 3, 1, 6; Dio Chrys. 19 [36], 24; 3 Km 6:8; Jos., Ant. 9, 149) Mk 3:3; Lk 4:35; 5:19; 6:8; J 20:19, 26 (ἔστη εἰς τὸ μέσον as Vi. Aesopi G 82 P.); Hs 9, 8, 5; also in the middle 9, 6, 1. W. gen. (X., An. 1, 5; 14a; Jer 21:4; 48:7; Sb 6270, 13) εἰς τὸ μ. αὐτῶν in the midst of them 9, 11, 7. Without the art. (LXX; Jos., Vi. 334; SibOr 3, 674) εἰς μ. τοῦ πεδίου in the middle of the plain Hs 9, 2, 1 (εἰς μ.=‘in the middle’, as Ps.-Clem., Hom. 3, 30 p. 44, 21 Lag.). τί … τὸ ἔριον εἰς μ. τῶν ἀκανθῶν τιθέασιν; Why do they place the wool in the middle of the thorns? 7:11. ἀναστὰς εἰς μ. he arose (and came) forward Mk 14:60 (cp. Theocr. 22, 82 ἐς μέσον=into the middle; Himerius, Or. 63 [=Or. 17], 2 εἰς μέσον ἔρχεσθαι=come into the open; X., Cyr. 4, 1, 1 στὰς εἰς τὸ μ.).—ἐν τῷ μ. among, before (more closely defined by the context, or = in public [so Clearch., Fgm. 45 οἴκοι καὶ μὴ ἐν τῷ μέσῳ; Appian, Liby. 15 §63]) Mt 14:6 (Dio Chrys. 30 [79], 39 ὀρχεῖσθαι ἐν τῷ μέσω; Lucian, Pereg. 8) and into the middle, before (them) (Vi. Aesopi W c. 86 στὰς ἐν τῷ μέσῳ ἔφη) Ac 4:7. Without the art. (LXX) ἐν μέσῳ (on the spelling ἐμ μέσῳ, which occurs several times as v.l., s. B-D-F §19, 1; Mlt-H. 105) abs. into the middle, before (someone) (Appian, Hann. 16 §67, Liby. 14 §59; Jos., Ant. 7, 278) J 8:3; MPol 18:1 and in the middle (Pla., Rep. 558a; Herm. Wr. 4, 3; PLille 1 recto, 5 [259 B.C.]; GrBar 13:4) J 8:9. W. gen. of place (Aeneas Tact. 1529; 1532; TestAbr A 12 p. 90, 21 [Stone p. 28], B 8 p. 113, 3 [St. p. 74]; ParJer 1:2; GrBar 10:2) τῆς θαλάσσης (En 97:7) in the middle of the lake Mk 6:47. τῆς πλατείας through the middle of the street Rv 22:2. ἐν μ. τῆς αὐλῆς in the middle of the courtyard Lk 22:55a; τοῦ τάφου GPt 13:55. ἐν μ. αὐτῆς within it (the city of Jerusalem) Lk 21:21; cp. Dg 12:3; MPol 12:1; 12:2(?). ἐν μ. τοῦ θρόνου καὶ τῶν τεσσάρων ζῴων on the center of the throne and among the four living creatures Rv 5:6a (w. double gen. also between: Appian, Hann. 14 §60, Bell. Civ. 5, 23 §92; Arrian, Anab. 1, 20, 2; 3, 28, 8 al.; Lucian, Fugit. 10 ἐν μ. ἀλαζονείας κ. φιλοσοφίας). ἐν μέσῳ τ. θρόνου around (on every side of) the throne 4:6 (but between the throne and a more remote point: RBrewer, JBL 71, ’52, 227–31).—ἐν μέσῳ ἐκκλησίας Hb 2:12 (Ps 21:23); cp. Ac 17:22. κατὰ μέσον (Jos., Bell. 5, 207; SibOr 3, 802 κατὰ μέσσον=‘in the middle’ [of the day]) κατὰ μ. τῆς νυκτός about midnight Ac 16:25 D; 27:27.

ⓒ The neut. μέσον serves as adv. (e.g., Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 43 §175 μ.=meanwhile) ἦν μέσον ὡς he was in the center of it as MPol 15:2; and is used as prep. w. gen. (B-D-F §215, 3; Rob. 644. Cp. Hdt. 9, 107, 2; Polyb. 8, 25, 1; Epict. 2, 22, 10; LXX, TestSol; TestAbr A 4 p. 80, 31 [Stone p. 8]; JosAs 24:21; Jos., Ant. 6, 65; SibOr 3, 319) μ. τῆς θαλάσσης in the middle of the lake Mt 14:24 v.l.; μ. γενεᾶς σκολιᾶς in the midst of a crooked generation Phil 2:15 (cp. Maximus Tyr. 36, 5a ἐν μέσῳ τῷ σιδηρῷ τούτῳ γένει).

② pert. to a position within a group, without focus on mediate position, among.

ⓐ as adj. ἐκάθητο ὁ Πέτρος μέσος αὐτῶν Peter was sitting among them Lk 22:55 (the point being not as center of attention but inconspicuously in the group; cp. Jos., Ant. 9, 107). μέσος ὑμῶν ἕστηκεν J 1:26 (Jos., Ant. 14, 23). τοῦ πύργου μέσου Hs 9, 8, 2. εἶδον … μέσον αὐτῶν τὸν Παῦλον AcPl Ha 11, 14.

ⓑ as subst. neuter ἀνὰ μέσον τινός (s. ἀνά 1) among someth. Mt 13:25. W. gen. pl. (TestJob 32:6 ἐν μέσῳ τῶν τέκνων σου) in the midst of, among in answer to the questions where and whither (B-D-F §215, 3 app.) Mt 18:2, 20; Mk 9:36; Lk 2:46; 24:36; Ac 1:15; 2:22; 6:15 D; 27:21; Rv 5:6b; cp. 6:6. Of close personal relationship ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν among you = in communion with you Lk 22:27; 1 Th 2:7.—ἐν μ. λύκων among wolves Mt 10:16; Lk 10:3; 2 Cl 5:2.—W. gen. pl. of things (Alciphron 3, 24, 3) Lk 8:7; Rv 1:13; 2:1. ἐκ (τοῦ) μ. from among (X., An. 1, 5, 14b; oracular response in Diod S 9, 3, 2; LXX=מִתּוֹךְ): αἴρειν τι (or τινά) ἐκ (τοῦ) μέσου (τινῶν) Col 2:14; 1 Cor 5:2 (s. αἴρω 3). ἁρπάσαι αὐτὸν ἐκ μ. αὐτῶν Ac 23:10 (s. ἁρπάζω 2a). ἀφορίζειν τοὺς πονηροὺς ἐκ μ. τῶν δικαίων Mt 13:49 (s. ἀφορίζω 1). γίνεσθαι ἐκ μ. 2 Th 2:7 (s. γίνομαι 6b). ἐξέρχεσθαι ἐκ μ. αὐτῶν from among them Ac 17:33; cp. 2 Cor 6:17 (cp. Is 52:11). κύριος λαμβάνει ἑαυτῷ ἔθνος ἐκ μ. ἐθνῶν 1 Cl 29:3 (cp. Dt 4:34).—B. 864. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μέσος
2 ὑπό

ὑπό (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX, En, TestSol; TestAbr A; TestAbr B 14 p. 148, 20 [Stone p. 84 gen.]; TestJob, Test12Patr, JosAs, ParJer, GrBar [gen.], ApcEsdr [gen.], ApcSed [gen.], ApcMos [gen.], AscIs [gen.], EpArist, Philo, Joseph.; apolog. [in Ath. only gen.]) prep. w. gen. and acc., in our lit. not w. dat. (s. B-D-F §203; Rob. 634; for usage s. B-D-F §232; Rob. 633–36; w. dat. TestSol 13:6 C; Just., D. 126, 5; 132, 2).—Lit. s.v. ἀνά, beg.

A. w. gen. marker of agency or cause, by (in our lit. as well as the LXX no longer in a local sense)

ⓐ w. the pass. of a verb

α. w. gen. of pers. τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ κυρίου (cp. Gen 45:27; SIG 679, 85; Just., D. 44, 1 εἰρῆσθαι ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ; τὰ εἰρημένα ὑπὸ τῶν προφητῶν) Mt 1:22 (Jos., Ant. 8, 223 ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ διὰ τ. προφήτου; Just., A I, 5, 4 διὰ Σωκράτους ὑπὸ λόγου); 2:15. Cp. vs. 16; Mk 1:13; Lk 2:18; J 14:21; Ac 4:11; 1 Cor 1:11; 2 Cor 1:4; Gal 1:11; Eph 2:11; Phil 3:12; 1 Th 1:4; 1 Cl 12:2; 2 Cl 1:2; Hm 4, 3, 6 and oft.; AcPlCor 2:7. Also w. the pass. in the sense ‘allow oneself to be … by’ Mt 3:6, 13; Mk 1:5, 9.

β. w. gen. of thing (cp. X., An. 1, 5, 5 ὑπὸ λιμοῦ ἀπολέσθαι; Diod S 5, 54, 3 ὑπὸ σεισμῶν διεφθάρησαν; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 22 p. 342, 17 Jac. ὑπὸ φαρμακῶν διαφθαρείς; Appian, Liby. 35 §147 ὑπὸ τοῦ χειμῶνος κατήγοντο, Bell. Civ. 4, 123 §515; Longus 2, 18 a nose smashed ὑπὸ πληγῆς τινος; Herm. Wr. 10, 4b; Tat. 8, 5 ὑπὸ βραχείας αὔρας νικηθείς; UPZ 42, 9 [162 B.C.]) καλύπτεσθαι ὑπὸ τῶν κυμάτων Mt 8:24. Cp. 11:7; 14:24; Lk 7:24; 8:14; Ac 27:41; Ro 3:21; 12:21; 1 Cor 10:29; 2 Cor 5:4; Col 2:18; Js 1:14; 3:4ab; 2 Pt 2:17; Jd 12; Rv 6:13; Hm 10, 1, 4.

ⓑ w. verbs and verbal expressions that have a pass. sense πάσχειν ὑπό τινος (Mel., P. 75, 546ff; s. πάσχω 3aβ; 3b) Mt 17:12; Mk 5:26; 1 Th 2:14ab. ὑπὸ χειρὸς ἀνθρώπων παθεῖν B 5:5 (cp. Mel., P. 96, 737 ὑπὸ δεξιᾶς Ἰσραηλίτιδος). ἀπολέσθαι 1 Cor 10:9f (Jos., Ant. 2, 300; cp. Sb 1209 Ἀπολλώνιος ἐτελεύτησεν ὑπὸ σκορπίου). ὑπομένειν ἀντιλογίαν Hb 12:3. τεσσεράκοντα παρὰ μίαν λαβεῖν 2 Cor 11:24. ἃ … παρέλαβον ὑπὸ τῶν … ἀποστόλων what I received from the apostles AcPlCor 2:2; ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ ἀναστάς raised by God Pol 9:2. γίνεσθαι ὑπό τινος be done by someone (s. γίνομαι 2a) Lk 13:17; 23:8; Ac 20:3; 26:6; Eph 5:12. Cp. Ac 23:30 v.l. The text of GJs 18:3 (not pap) is suspect. W. ὑπὸ γυναικός Hv 1, 2, 3 someth. like ‘it was brought about’ is to be supplied.

ⓒ w. nouns ἡ ἐπιτιμία ἡ ὑπὸ τῶν πλειόνων the punishment at the hands of the majority 2 Cor 2:6 (cp. X., Cyr. 3, 3, 2 ἡ ὑπὸ πάντων τιμή; SIG 1157, 10 διὰ τὰς εὐεργεσίας τὰς ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ; Esth 1:20 ὁ νόμος ὁ ὑπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως).

ⓓ When used w. an act., ὑπό introduces the one through whose agency the action expressed by the verb becomes poss. (Hdt. 9, 98; Pla., Phlb. 66a ὑπʼ ἀγγέλων φράζειν=‘say through messengers’; cp. Herm. Wr. 9, 9 ὑπὸ δεισιδαιμονίας βλασφημεῖν; Just., D. 2, 6 ὑπὸ βλακείας ἤλπιζον αὐτίκα κατόψεσθαι τὸν θεόν=in my stupidity I thought that I would forthwith look upon God) ἀποκτεῖναι ὑπὸ τῶν θηρίων Rv 6:8. ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου βλέπεις you see under the guidance of an angel Hs 9, 1, 2b; cp. ibid. 2a and s. Mayser II/2, 511f; to the ref. there add PLeid XI, 1, col. 1, 15.

B. w. acc.

① a position below an object or another position, under, w. acc. of place under, below

ⓐ answering the question ‘whither?’ ἔρχεσθαι 1 Cl 16:17; Hs 8, 1, 1 (PsSol 18:7). εἰσέρχεσθαι ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην Mt 8:8 (cp. Ar. 15, 7 ὑπὸ στέγην εἰσάγουσιν); Lk 7:6. συνάγειν 1 Cl 12:6. ἐπισυνάγειν Mt 23:37; Lk 13:34. τιθέναι Mt 5:15; Mk 4:21ab; Lk 11:33. κρύπτειν (cp. Job 20:12) 1 Cl 12:3. Also (below) at κάθου ὑπὸ τὸ ὑποπόδιόν μου Js 2:3 (cp. ParJer 5:1 ἐκάθισεν ὑπὸ τὴν σκίαν; Just., D. 107, 3). ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας under the feet (Hdt. 7, 88, 1) 1 Cor 15:25, 27; Eph 1:22. ὁ θεὸς συντρίψει τὸν σατανᾶν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας ὑμῶν God will crush Satan so that he will lie at your feet Ro 16:20.

ⓑ in answer to the question ‘where?’ (Il. 5, 267; Ael. Aristid. 39 p. 734 D.: τὰ ὑπὸ τὸν ἥλιον; Maximus Tyr. 35, 5b) Mk 4:32. ὄντα ὑπὸ τὴν συκῆν J 1:48. Cp. Ro 3:13 (Ps 13:3; 139:4); 1 Cor 10:1; Jd 6. ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν under heaven=on earth Ac 4:12; as adj. ὁ ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν (found) under heaven=on earth (Demosth. 18, 270; UPZ 106, 14 [99 B.C.] τῶν ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν χωρῶν; Just., A II, 5, 2; cp. without the art. PsSol 2:32; TestAbr A 15 p. 96, 5 [Stone p. 40]) 2:5; Col 1:23; Hm 12, 4, 2; ἡ ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν (χώρα to be supplied; cp. Ex 17:14; Job 28:24) Lk 17:24a; cp. b. ὑπὸ ζυγὸν δοῦλοι (ζυγός 1) 1 Ti 6:1.

② marker of that which is in a controlling position, under, under the control of, under obligation in ref. to power, rule, sovereignty, command, etc. w. acc. (OGI 56, 13 [237 B.C.] ὑπὸ τὴν βασιλείαν τασσόμενοι; PHib 44 [253 B.C.] et al. in pap; Just., D. 52, 4 εἶναι … ὑπὸ ἴδιον βασιλέα) ἄνθρωπος ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν τασσόμενος (ἐξουσία 4) Lk 7:8a; cp. Mt 8:9a; Hs 1:3 (Vett. Val. 209, 35 ὑπὸ ἑτέρων ἐξουσίαν ὄντας). ἔχων ὑπʼ ἐμαυτὸν στρατιώτας (Polyb. 4, 87, 9 Μεγαλέαν ὑφʼ αὐτὸν εἶχεν) Mt 8:9b; Lk 7:8b (OGI 86, 11 [III B.C.] οἱ ὑπʼ αὐτὸν τεταγμένοι στρατιῶται). ὑπό τινα εἶναι be under someone’s power (Thu. 6, 86, 4; PSI 417, 36 [III B.C.] ὑπὸ τὸν ὅρκον εἶναι) Gal 3:25; 4:2; ὑφʼ ἁμαρτίαν Ro 3:9; ὑπὸ νόμον 6:14, 15 (both opp. ὑπὸ χάριν); 1 Cor 9:20abcd; Gal 4:21; 5:18; ὑπὸ κατάραν 3:10. ὑπὸ νόμον ἐφρουρούμεθα vs. 23. γενόμενος ὑπὸ νόμον Gal 4:4 (γινομαι 9d and Thu. 1, 110, 2 Αἴγυπτος ὑπὸ βασιλέα ἐγένετο). ὑπὸ τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου ἤμεθα δεδουλωμένοι vs. 3. συνέκλεισεν ἡ γραφὴ τὰ πάντα ὑπὸ ἁμαρτίαν 3:22 (s. συγκλείω 2). πεπραμένος ὑπὸ τὴν ἁμαρτίαν Ro 7:14. ταπεινώθητε ὑπὸ τὴν χεῖρα τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Pt 5:6 (s. ταπεινόω 3); cp. οὐκ ἔκλινας τὴν κεφαλήν σου ὑπὸ τὴν κραταιὰν χεῖραν GJs 15:4; τὸ αἷμά σου ὑπὸ τὴν χεῖράν μού ἐστιν 23:2. οἱ ὑπὸ νόμον those who are under (the power of, obligation to) the law Gal 4:5 (Just., D. 45, 3 [w. art.]; cp. X., Cyr. 3, 3, 6 τινὰς τῶν ὑφʼ ἑαυτούς).

③ marker of the approximate time of a period, about w. acc. (w. varying degrees of precision: in earlier Gk.: Aristoph et al.; PTebt 50, 18 [112 B.C.]; Jos., Ant. 14, 420. Rare in LXX and our lit.) ὑπὸ τὸν ὄρθρον about daybreak Ac 5:21 (s. ὄρθρος).

④ Special uses

ⓐ ὑφʼ ἕν at one stroke (Epict. 3, 22, 33; Wsd 12:9; Just., D. 65, 3 of topics treated ‘collectively’) B 4:4. ὑπὸ χεῖρα continually (see s.v. χείρ 3) Hv 3, 10, 7; 5, 5; m 4, 3, 6.

ⓑ ὑπὸ τὰ ἴχνη IEph 12:2 is translated in the footsteps. Can ὑπό mean this, someth. like Ezk 13:8 (ed. JZiegler ’52 v.l.), where it stands for עַל? But if it = ‘under’, then τὰ ἴχνη would require a different interpretation. See ἴχνος 2. S. the grammarians: Kühner-Gerth II/1 521–26; Schwyzer II 522–23; Mayser II/2 509–15; Radermacher 114–19.—DELG. M-M.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὑπό
3 ὑπό

ὑπό [pron. full] [ῠ], Prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: [dialect] Aeol. [full] ὐπά Alc.39; [dialect] Boeot. [full] ὑπά

A Ἀρχ.Δελτ. 14
Pl. ii 19 (Thespiae, iii B.C.); [dialect] Ion. ηυπύ only in IG 14.871 (Cumae, v B.C.); Arc. [full] ὁπύ Schwyzer 664.15,21 (Orchom.Arc., iv B.C.); in [dialect] Ep. [full] ὑπαί (also B. 12.139): this is found in Hom. only six times as a well-attested reading (ὑ. πόδα Il.2.824
, ὑ. δέ 3.217
, 11.417, 12.149, ὑ. δείους 10.376
, 15.4); elsewh. (before λ ν ρ ϝ ) it is weakly attested as v. l. for ὑπὸ ([etym.] ?ὑπόX ¯ ), e.g. ποσσὶ δ' ὑπὸ (v.l. ὑπαὶ) λιπαροῖσι Il.2.44
, al.; but ὑπαὶ νεφέων is given by most codd. in Il.15.625, 16.375 (v. Allen ed. maj.), and ὑπαὶ νεφέεσσι Anon.
ap. Plu.2.38e; also in compds., ὑπαιδείδοικα h.Merc. 165
, ὑπαιφοινίσσω (q. v.); it is not freq. in Trag. Poets, A.Ag. 892, 944, 1164 (lyr.), Eu. 417, S.El. 711, 1418 (lyr.), Inach. in PTeb. 692 ii5 (lyr.), E.El. 1188 (lyr.), Ar. Ach. 970 (paratrag.). (With ὑπό ([etym.] ὕπο) cf. Skt. úpa 'towards, near to, etc.', Goth. uf 'under'.)

A WITH GENITIVE,

I of Place, with Verbs of motion, from under, αὖτις ἀναστήσονται ὑ. ζόφου they will rise again from under the gloom, Il.21.56; ὑ. χθονὸς ἧκε φόωσδε Hes.Th. 669
; ῥέει κρήνη ὑ. σπείους Od.9.141
, cf. Pl.Phdr. 230b; ὄσσε δεινὸν ὑ. βλεφάρων ἐξεφάανθεν Il.19.17
; ἐσιδόντες ὑπαὶ χειμῶνος αἴγλαν from under the storm-cloud, B.12.139; esp. of rescuing from under another's power, after the Verbs ἐρύεσθαι, ἁρπάζειν, ῥύεσθαι, ἐρύειν, Il.9.248, 13.198, 17.224, 235;
ἤγαγεν ὑμέτερόνδ' ἀνδροκτασίης ὕ. λυγρῆς
from the consequences of,
23.86
; also ἵππους μὲν λῦσαν ὑ. ζυγοῦ from under the yoke, 8.543, Od.4.39; ὑπ' ἀρνειοῦ λυόμην I loosed myself from under the ram, 9.463; σπλάγχνων ὕπο ματέρος μόλεν, i.e. was born, Pi.N.1.35, cf. O.6.43; rarely in Trag., ὑ. πτερῶν σπάσας E.Andr. 441
; περᾷ γὰρ ἥδ' ὑ. σκηνῆς πόδα Id.Hec.53
; once in Hdt., τὰς δέ οἱ ἵππους ὑ. τοῦ ἅρματος νεμομένας ἀφανισθῆναι 4.8
; αἴ τις ὑ. τῶν νομίων τῶν ἐπιϝοικων ἀνχωρέῃ SIG47.27
(Locris, v B.C.); cf. ὑπέκ.

2 of the object under which a thing is or is placed, under, beneath, with collat. sense of motion, as μοχλὸν ὑ. σποδοῦ ἤλασα πολλῆς thrust it in under the embers, Od. 9.375; ὑ. στέρνοιο τυχήσας Il.4.106
; τοὺς μὲν ὑ. χθονὸς εὐρυοδείης πέμψαν Hes.Th. 717
: also without the sense of motion, ὑπ' ἀνθερεῶνος ὀχεὺς τέτατο Il.3.372
; βάθιστον ὑ. χθονός ἐστι βέρεθρον 8.14
; ἐτέθαπτο ὑ. χθονός Od.11.52
; κεκευθὼς πολεμίας ὑ. χθονός A.Th. 588
; ὑπ' ἀγκῶνος βέλη Pi.O.2.83
; νέρθεν ὑπ' ἐγκεφάλοιο Il.16.347
; τὰ ὑ. γῆς δικαιωτήρια Pl.Phdr. 249a
; δεξιὰν ὑφ' εἵματος κρύπτειν E.Hec. 342
; φέρειν ζώνης ὕπο ib. 762: Thom.Mag.p.375 R. says that ὑ. = under takes gen. in [dialect] Att., acc. in 'Hellenic' Greek; κατακρύψας ὑ. κόπρου, which is v.l. in Od.9.329 for ὑ. κόπρῳ, is called by Eust.1631.36 Ἀττικώτερον, ὁποῖον καὶ τὸ φέρειν τι ὑ. κόλπου ἢ ὑ. μάλης (v. κόλπος, μάλη); but in [dialect] Att. Prose, Hdt., and the Koine ὑ. c. gen. in signfs. 1.1, 2 is almost limited to these and a few other phrases, esp. ὑ. γῆς; it is not found at all in Th., LXX, Ptolemaic papyri, and NT; X. has ὑ. ἁμάξης ( = from under) An.6.4.22,25; the Orators have only ὑ. μάλης, Lys.Fr.54, D.29.12; ὑ. γῆς is found in Pl.Ap. 18b, Mx. 246d, R. 414d, al., Arist.Mete. 352b6, al., Hipparch.2.2.45, Plb.18.18.10 ([etym.] ὑ. τῆς γῆς), 21.28.3,10.

b metaph., ἀρετῶσι δὲ λαοὶ ὑπ' αὐτοῦ under his rule, Od.19.114.

II of Cause or Agency, freq. with pass. Verbs, and with intr. Verbs in pass. sense, μή πως τάχ' ὑπ' αὐτοῦ δουρὶ δαμήῃς Il.3.436
, cf. 4.479; ἡνιόχοιο ἐν κονίῃσι πεσόντος ὑφ' Ἕκτορος 17.428
; εὖτ' ἂν πολλοὶ ὑφ' Ἕκτορος θνῂσκοντες πίπτωσι 1.242; τὸν.. τοκέα ὑ. τοῦ.. παιδὸς ἀποθνῄσκειν Hdt.1.137
; οἵαις ὑπ' αὐτοῦ πημοναῖσι κάμπτομαι A.Pr. 308
, cf. Th.7, al.; πέλεκυς.. ὅς τ' εἶσιν διὰ δουρὸς ὑπ' ἀνέρος Il.3.61
; ὑπ' Ἀχαιῶν.. φοβέοντο.. ἀπὸ νηῶν 16.303
; πάσχειν δὲ κακῶς ἐχθρὸν ὑπ' ἐχθρῶν A.Pr. 1042
(anap.); ὑ. τοῦ Μήδου δεινότερα τούτων πάσχοντες Th.1.77
; ἐκπεσόντες ὑ. τοῦ πλήθους Id.4.66
; ἀναστάτων Καμαριναίων γενομένων ὑ. Συρακοσίων Id.6.5
; ὑφ' ὑμῶν αὐτῶν καὶ μὴ ὑ. τῶν πολεμίων τοῦτο παθεῖν Id.4.64
; κλύοντές ἐσμεν αἰσχίστους λόγους.. τοῦδ' ὑπ' ἀνδρὸς ἀρτίως we have been called shameful names by.., S.Aj. 1321; κακῶς ὑ. τῶν πολιτῶν ἀκούειν to be ill spoken of by.., Isoc.4.77, cf. Pl.Hp.Ma. 304e, X.An. 7.7.23; of a subordinate agent, ὑ. κήρυκος προαγορεύειν, ἀπειπεῖν κηρύκων ὕπο, Hdt.9.98, E.Alc. 737, cf. Th.6.32; ἐμῶν ὑπ' ἀγγέλων.. πορεύεται S.Tr. 391
; ὑ. ἀγγέλων πέμπων Pl.Phlb. 66a
: sts. with a verbal Subst., τὸ ὑ. νόμου ἐπίταγμα (i. e. ἐπιταττόμενον) Id.R. 359a; ἐκφορὰ φίλων ὕπο A.Th. 1029
; ἡ ὑπ' ἀρετῆς Ἡρακλέους παίδευσις X. Mem.2.1.34
; ἡ ὑ. πάντων τιμή Id.Cyr.3.3.2
; Ἥρας δεσμοὶ ὑ. ὑέος Pl. R. 378d
; so ἄτρωτον ἦν ὑ. στύγους ( = οὐ τετρωμένον) prob. in A.Ch. 532.

2 also in pregnant phrases, not only of the immediate act of the agent, but also of its further result, ὅθ' ὑ. λιγέων ἀνέμων σπέρχωσιν ἄελλαι hasten driven on by them, Il.13.334; ὑφ' Ἕκτορος.. φεύγοντες fleeing before him, 18.149, χάσσονται ὑπ' ἔγχεος 13.153
, cf. 7.64, 11.119, 424, Od.5.320, 7.263, al.; πράγματα εἶχον ὑ. λῃστῶν X.HG5.1.5
; ἔπαινον, αἰτίαν ἔχειν ὑ. τινῶν, Hdt.9.78, A.Eu.99; οὐκέτι ἀποχωρεῖν οἷόν τ' ἦν ὑ. τῶν ἱππέων Th.7.78
, cf. Ar.V. 1084.

3 freq. of things as well as persons, ὡς διάκειμαι ὑ. τῆς νόσου Th.7.77
; κεῖμαι νούσου ὕ. στυγερᾶς IG42(1).125.8
(Epid., iii B.C.); χαλεπῶς ἔχειν ὑ. τραυμάτων Pl.Tht. 142b
; ὑ. δόρατος πλαγείς IG42(1).122.64
(Epid., iv B.C.); ὑ. ἔχιος φῦμα ib.123.4 (ibid., iv B.C.); ἰάθη ὑ. ὄφιος ib.121.113 (ibid., iv B.C.); κατεσκεύασαν τὰς πύλας κλείεσθαι ὑ. σφύρας τε μεγάλης καὶ κτύπου παμμεγέθους γιγνομένου Aen.Tact.20.4
: of the agency of feelings, passions, etc., ἀνόρουσ' ὑ. χάρματος h.Cer. 371
; ἐνδακρύειν, ἀνολολύξαι χαρᾶς ὕπο, A.Ag. 541, 587; μαίνεται.. ὑφ' ἡδονῆς S.El. 1153
; χλωρὸς ὑπαὶ δείους Il.10.376
; ὑ. δέους ἔρρηξε φωνήν Hdt.1.85
, cf. Th.6.33; οὐ δυνατὸν τὸν δῆμον ἐσόμενον ὑ. τῶν κακῶν καρτερεῖν Id.4.66
; ὑ. κακοῦ ἀγρυπνίῃσι εἴχετο Hdt.3.129
; ὑπ' ἄλγους A.Eu. 183
; ὑπ' ὀργῆς Ar.V. 1083
; ὑ. λύπης S.OT 1073
: hence ὑπό is used even with active Verbs, where a passive word may be supplied, e.g. ὑ. ἀρετῆς καὶ προθυμίης συνεπλήρουν τὰς νέας from courage, i. e. impelled by courage, Hdt.8.1; ὤρυσσον ὑ. μαστίγων Id.7.22
, cf. 56; οὐδὲ σέ γε δόλος ἔσχ' ὑ. χειρὸς ἐμᾶς by my agency, S.Ph. 1118 (lyr.); αἰ μήτις αὐτὸς δοίη, μὴ ὑπ' ἀνάγκας not under compulsion, GDI5128.5 ([place name] Vaxos).

4 ὑπό freq. serves to denote the attendant or accompanying circumstances, νέφος ἐρχόμενον κατὰ πόντον ὑ. Ζεφύροιο ἰωῆς Il.4.276
, cf. 16.591, etc.: sts. with part. added, ἀμφὶ δὲ νῆες σμερδαλέον κονάβησαν ἀϋσάντων ὑπ' Ἀχαιῶν at their shouting, i.e. when they shouted, 2.334, 16.277; ἴαχε σάλπιγξ ἄστυ περιπλομένων δηΐων ὕ. 18.220
.

5 of accompanying music, to give the time, κώμαζον ὑπ' αὐλοῦ Hes.Sc. 281
, cf. 278; ᾄδων ὑπ' αὐλητῆρος Archil.123
, cf. Thgn.825, Charon Fr.9; πίνειν ὑ. σάλπιγγος Ar.Ach. 1001
: generally, of anything attendant, δαΐδων ὕ. λαμπομενάων ἠγίνεον by torchlight, Il.18.492, cf. E.Hel. 639 (lyr.), Ion 1474 (lyr.); καταθάψομεν.. ὑ. κλαυθμῶν A.Ag. 1554
(anap.); ὑπ' εὐκλείας θανεῖν E.Hipp. 1299
; εἴσειμ' ὑπαὶ πτερύγων κιχλᾶν καὶ κοψίχων Ar.Ach. 970
; ὑπ' εὐφήμου βοῆς θῦσαι offer a sacrifice accompanied by it, S.El. 630; ὑ. φανοῦ πορεύεσθαι by lantern-light, X.Lac.5.7; ὑ. πομπῆς ἐξάγειν τινά in or with solemn procession, Hdt.2.45, cf. Ar.Th. 1030; ὑ. βίης βήξας coughing with violence, violently, Hdt.6.107; ἐτόξευον ὑ. μαστίγων, i.e. they shot and lashed, X.An.3.4.25: v. infr. B. 11.4, C. IV. 1.

6 ὑ. Ἑλλανοδικᾶν, = ἐπί c. gen., SIG171 (Olympia, iv B.C.).

7 Math., ἡ ὑ. ΘΔΗ the angle ΘΔΗ ( = ἡ ὑ. τῶν ΘΔ, ΔΗ περιεχομένη γωνία), Procl. Hyp.2.26; but also τὸ ὑ. τῶν ΑΓ, ΓΒ the rectangle contained by ΑΓ, ΓΒ, = ΑΓ χ ΓΒ, Euc.2.4.

8 ναῦλον ὄνων γ εἰς τὴν πόλιν ὑ. οἴνου laden with wine, Pap. in Hermes 28.163 (ii A.D.), cf. ib.479, and infr. C. IV. 2.

B WITH DATIVE (esp. in Poets, never in LXX (Jb.12.5 is dub. l.) or NT, not common in Arist., Ptolemaic papyri, or Plb.), of Position under, ὑ. ποσσί Il.2.784
, al.; ὑ. πλατανίστῳ ib. 307, cf. 18.558; ὑ. Τμώλῳ at its foot, 2.866, cf. Od.1.186; Βερύσιοι ὑ. τῇ Ἴδῃ IG12.191.11
, cf. 373.118, al.; ὑ. τῇ ἀκροπόλι Hdt.6.105
; τῶν θανόντων ὑπ' Ἰλίῳ under its walls, E.Hec. 764, cf. A.Ag. 860; πέτρῃ ὕ. γλαφυρῇ εὗδον, Βορέω ὑπ' ἰωγῇ Od.14.533
; ὑ. τοῖς ὄρεσιν ἔχειν τὰς πηγάς Arist.Mete. 350b27
; ὑ. πέτρᾳ παῖς IG42(1).122.19
(Epid., iv B.C.); ὑ. τῷ ναῷ ἀστραγαλίζοντος αὐτοῦ ib.121.25 (ibid., iv B.C.); ηυπὺ τῇ κλίνῃ τούτῃ ληνὸς (or Λῆνος) ηύπυ ib.14.871 (Cumae, v B.C.); στρουθοὶ ὑ. τῇ τραπέζῃ Michel 832.33
(Samos, iv B.C.); ὑ. τῇ μασχάλῃ Hp.Art.11
; χέλυν δ' ὑ. μασχάλῃ εἶχεν h.Merc. 242
; ὑ. ταῖς μασχάλαις Arist.PA 688b5
,14; ὁ ὑ. τῇ γῇ ἀήρ under the earth, Id.Cael. 295a28; ἐὰν ὑ. σοὶ κατακλινῇ lies next below you, Pl.Smp. 222e; ὑφ' ἅρμασι under, i.e. yoked to, the chariot, Il.8.402, 18.244; εἶχε μάχαιραν ὑφ' αὑτῷ παρεσκευασμένος Plb.8.20.6
codd., cf. POxy. 1800 Fr.2.36 (Vit.Aesop.); ὑ. τοῖς χιτωνίσκοις περιζώματα φοροῦσιν Plb.12.26a
.4, cf. 13.7.9; τά τε θηρία καὶ τὰς ὑπ' αὐτοῖς σχεδίας under them, on which they stood, Id.3.46.8; τῆς γῆς τῆς ὑ. τῷ κόσμῳ κειμένης Timae.
ap. eund.12.25.7; οἱ ὑ. τῇ ἄρκτῳ, τῇ μεσημβρία, οἰκοῦντες Adam.2.31
, cf. Arist.Pr. 940a37, Phgn. 806b16; ὑ. τῷ μετώπῳ ὀφρύες Id.HA 491b14
; ὑ. τῷ γενείῳ Plb.34.10.9
; τὰ ὑ. τοῖς ὕδασι καὶ ὑμέσι καὶ ὑέλοις Hero
*Deff.135.12; ὑ. τῷ δέρματι Gal. 18(2).102
.

2 with Verbs of motion, where rest or position follows, εἷσαν ὑ. φηγῷ set [him] down under it, Il.5.693; ἔζευξαν ὑφ' ἅρμασιν.. ἵππους Od.3.478
, cf. Il.24.782; ὑ. δ' ἄξοσι.. ἔπιπτον 16.378
, cf. X.Cyr.7.1.37; δέμνι' ὑπ' αἰθούσῃ θέμεναι Il.24.644
.

3 in such phrases as ὑ. χερσί τινος ἁλῶναι, δαμῆναι, 2.374, 860, al.; ἐμῇς ὑ. χερσὶ δάμασσον 3.352
; ὑ. δουρὶ δαμῆναι 5.653
, etc.; ἔκπεσον ἵππων Ἀτρεΐδεω ὑ. χερσί 11.180
; ὤλετο.. ὑ. γαμφηλῇσι λέοντος 16.489
; πέπληγμαι δ' ὑπαὶ δάκει φοινίῳ A.Ag. 1164
(lyr.); ἐν κονίῃσι πέσοιεν ὑπ' ἀνδράσι Il.6.453
; ὑ. τινὶ κτείνεσθαι 16.490
.

4 behind, ὑ. φάλαγγι Ascl.Tact.6.1
; under the cover or protection of, ὑ. τούτῳ τῷ φράγματι τοὺς ὑπορύσσοντας εἶναι Aen.Tact.37.9
; ὑ. ταῖς αὑτῶν ἀσφαλείαις Plb. 1.57.8
, 4.12.10, 16.6.1.

II of the person under whose hand, power, or influence, or the thing by or through which a thing is done, ὑπ' Ἀργείοισι φέβοντο fled before them, Il.11.121; freq. in Hom. with intr. or pass. Verbs, ἐφόβηθεν ὑφ' Ἕκτορι Il.15.637
; ὁρμηθέντες ὑ. πληγῇσιν ἱμάσθλης Od.13.82
; βῆ.. θεῶν ὑ. πομπῇ Il.6.171
; ὦρτο δὲ κῦμα πνοιῇ ὕπο 23.215
; ὑ. λαίλαπι βέβριθε χθών 16.384
; τεκεῖν, τεκέσθαι ὑ. τινί, 2.714, 728, 742; ἀτῆθαι ὑ. τῷ μεμφομένῳ GDI4994.8
([place name] Crete); ὁ χρησμὸς ὁ γεγονὼς ὑ. τοῖ Ἀπόλλωνι Inscr.Magn.38.5
, cf. 12,31,52.

2 expressing subjection or dependence, ὑ. τινί under one's power, δέδμητο δὲ λαὸς ὑπ' αὐτῷ Od.3.305
, cf. Il.9.156; ὑπ' ἀνδράσιν οἶκον ἔχουσιν Od. 7.68
; εἶναι ὑ. τισί to be subordinate, subject to them, Th.1.32; ὑ. Χείρωνι τεθραμμένος under the eye of.., Pl.R. 391c; ἔχειν ὑφ' ἑαυτῷ have under one, at one's command, X.Cyr.2.1.26; τὰ θηρία τὰ ὑ. τοῖς ἀνθρώποις Pl.R. 563c
; ὑ. τινὶ στρατεύσασθαι Plu.Cic.44
: in pregnant sense, ἵνα.. πάντα ὑ. Πέρσῃσι γένηται Hdt.7.11
, cf. Th.7.64; ὑπ' ἑωυτῷ ποιήσασθαι Hdt.7.157
; κινδυνεύσαιμ' ἂν ὑ. τῇ δυσχερεστάτῃ γενέσθαι τύχῃ Lys.24.6
; ὑ. τῷ Μακεδόνι ταττομένων Plb.18.11.4
; τοὺς τραφέντας ὑ. τούτοις Id.6.7.2
.

3 of the subordination of things coming under a class, αἱ ὑ. ταῖς τέχναις ἐργασίαι Pl.Smp. 205c
; τὸ ὑ. ταῖς γεωμετρίαις Id.R. 511b
; ὄργανα.. τὰ ὑ. τῇ μουσικῇ Id.Hp.Ma. 295d
.

4 as in A. 11.5, ὑπ' αὐλητῆρι πρόσθ' ἔκιον advanced to the music of the flute-player, Hes.Sc. 283; ὑπ' αὐλῷ, ὑ. κήρυκι καὶ θεολόγῳ, Luc.DDeor.2.2, Alex.19; ὑ. μάστιξι διορύττειν τὸν Ἄθω Plu.2.470e
: generally, of attendant circumstances, ἐξ ἁλὸς εἶσι.. πνοιῇ ὕπο Ζεφύροιο Od.4.402
; ὑ. ῥάβδοις καὶ πελέκεσι κατιών escorted by the lictors, Plu.Publ.10; ὑ. σκότῳ, νυκτί, A.Ag. 1030 (lyr.), A.R. 1.1022, etc.; λάμπει δ' ὑ. μαρμαρυγαῖς ὁ χρυσός B.3.17
; αἰθομένα δᾲς ὑ. ξανθαἵσι πεύκαις Pi.Fr.79
; ὑ. φωτὶ πολλῷ προσῄει Plu.Galb.14
; ὑ. λαμπάσιν ἡμμέναις Hld.10.41
; ὑ. πολλῷ στρατῷ escorted by a great host, Nic.Dam.10J.; ὑ. δικαιοσύνῃ διαγαγεῖν τὸν βίον Pl.Ep. 335d
.— ὑπό has no sense c. dat. which it has not also c. gen.; but all its senses c. gen. do not belong to the dat.:—later ὑπό c. dat. is found as a mere periphr. of the dat., στέφος.. αὐτὸς ὑφ' ἡμετέραις πλεξάμενος παλάμαις AP5.73
(Rufin.), cf. 85 (Claudian.); λέων ὑπ' ἄκοντι τετυμμένος A.R.2.26
, cf. Man.2.131.

C WITH ACCUSATIVE, of Place; to express motion towards and under an object, ὑ. σπέος ἤλασε μῆλα drove them under, i.e. into, the cave, Il.4.279; ὑ. ζυγὸν ἤγαγεν Od.3.383
; σεῦ ὕστερος εἶμ' ὑ. γαῖαν, i.e. shall die, Il.18.333; νέεσθαι ὑ. ζόφον 23.51
, cf. Od.3.335; κατακρύπτειν τινὰ ὑ. τὴν αὐτὴν θύρην under shelter of it, i.e. behind it, Hdt.1.12; πάϊς ὣς ὑ. μητέρα δύσκεν εἰς Αἴαντα Il.8.271
; ὅκως ἔωσι ὑ. τὸν πεζὸν στρατὸν τὸν σφέτερον Hdt.9.96
; ὑ. τὸν πρῶτον λόχον τῶν ὁπλιτῶν τὸν πρῶτον λόχον τῶν ψιλῶν τετάχθαι Ael.Tact.15.2
; of coming close up under a lofty citadel, ἤλθεθ' ὑ. Τροίην up to T., Od.4.146; ὅτ' ἔμελλεν ὑ. πτόλιν αἰπύ τε τεῖχος ἵξεσθαι Il.11.181
; παυρότερον λαὸν ἀγαγόνθ' ὑ. τεῖχος ἄρειον 4.407
; ὑ. τὰ τείχη φεύγειν Plb.1.74.11
; ὑ. τὰς ἴλας φεύγειν Id.3.65.7
, cf. 3.105.6, 11.21.5, al.; ὑ. ταὐτὸ στέγος εἰσελθεῖν GDI3536
B 3 ([place name] Cnidus); πᾶν ὃ ἐὰν ἔλθῃ.. ὑ. τὴν ῥάβδον LXXLe.27.32
, cf. De.4.11, al.; so ὑ. δικαστήριον ὑπαχθείς, ἀγαγόντες, Hdt.6.72, 104 (cf. ὑπάγειν ὑ. τοὺς ἐφόρους ib.82) prob. refers to the elevated seats of the judges in court, cf. ὑπάγω A ΙΙ.

2 of Position or Extension under an object, without sense of motion, Ἀρκαδίην ὑ. Κυλλήνης ὄρος Il.2.603
, cf. 824, etc.; ἰκριώσασι ὑ. τὴν ὀροφήν IG12.374.76
; ἐργασαμένοις τὸ ἄνθεμον ὑ. τὴν ἀσπίδα ib.371.9; τὰ μὲν ὑ. τὸν λόφον καὶ τὰμ φάραγγα Inscr.Prien.37.162
(ii B.C.); ἀνθέντω ὑ. τὸν ναὸν τᾶς Δάματρος IG5(1).1498.13
(loc. inc., ii B.C.); ὅσσοι ἔασιν ὑπ' ἠῶ τ' ἠέλιόν τε everywhere under the sun, Il.5.267; ὑπ' αὐγὰς ἠελίοιο φοιτῶσι Od.2.181
; τῶν ὑ. τοῦτον τὸν ἥλιον.. ἀνθρώπων D.18.270
; τὰ ὑ. τὴν ἄρκτον Hdt. 5.10
, cf. Arist.Mete. 362a17; οἴκησις ἡ λεγομένη ὑ. τὸν πόλον Gem.5.38
, cf. 16.21, al.; ὑ. τὸν οὐρανόν LXXEx.17.14
, al., UPZ106.14 (i B.C.); τὸ ὑ. τὴν ἀκρόπολιν Th.2.17
; ὁ ὑ. γῆν λεγόμενος εἶναι θεός Hdt.7.114
, cf. Il.19.259; ὑ. γῆν is more freq. than ὑ. γῆς in Arist., Mete. 349b29, al., in Hipparch., 1.3.10, al., and entirely supersedes ὑ. γῆς in Hdt., 2.124, 125, 127, 148, 150, 3.102, 4.195, 7.114, and Gem., 2.19, al.; it is found also in Plb.21.28.11, etc.; ὑ. γῆν the nadir, opp. μεσουράνημα, PLond.1.98r.49, 110.33 (i/ii A.D.); also ἄγχε δέ μιν.. ἱμὰς ἁπαλὴν ὑ. δειρήν Il.3.371
; Τρῶες.. πτῶσσον ὑ. κρημνούς 21.26
; ἀγέροντο.. ἄλσος ὕ. σκιερόν Od.20.278
; τρωφεὶς ὑ. τὸν ὀφθαλμόν IG42(1).122.120
(Epid., iv B.C.); οὐλὴ ὑπ' ὀφθαλμὸν δεξιόν PCair.Zen76.13
(iii B.C.); ὑ. τὸ μέρος τοῦ ἐνοφειλομένου ὑπογραψάτω ὅσον ἰδίᾳ ἔχει PRev.Laws 19.2
(iii B.C.); κείμενος ὑ. τὸν ὀμφαλόν Sor.1.7
, cf. 67, al.; ὑ. τὰς πύλας ἵππων πόδες φαίνονται Th.5.10
; μὴ ὑποτιθέναι κύλικα ὑ. τὴν κλίνην IG12(5).593
A21 (Ceos, v B. C.); ὑ. τὸν ὀδόν ib.42(1).102.249 (Epid., iv B.C.); καταψύξατε ὑ. τὸ δένδρον LXX Ge.18.4
; ὑ. τὸν λέβητα ib.Ec.7.7(6); ὑ. τοὺς πόδας ib.La.3.34; εἰς τοὺς ὑ. πόδα χωρεῖ τόπους Dsc.5.75
(v. πούς 1.6
g); ἡ ὑ. πόδα (sc. γραμμή ) the base of a triangle, Hero *Mens.55; also ὑπ' αὐγὰς.. λεύσσουσαι πέπλους holding them up to the light, E.Hec. 1154; also ὑ. τὸν ὀφθαλμόν close to the eye, Arist. Pr. 874a9; ὑποκειμένης τῆς Εὐβοίας ὑ. τὴν Ἀττικήν Isoc.4.108
; ὑπ' αὐτὴν ἐσχάτην στήλην ἔχων ἔχριμπτ' ἀεὶ σύριγγα S.El. 720
; εἰ θεωρήσειεν ὑπ' αὐγὰς τὸν ἀνθρώπειον βίον Iamb.Protr.8
(cf. αὐγή 1
): of subordinate position. κατακλίνεσθαι ὑ. τινά Luc.Symp.9
; τίς ὑ. τίνα; who is next to whom, Onos.10.2.

b Math., ὁ κύβος ὁ ὑ. τὴν.. σφαῖραν inscribed in the sphere, Papp.440.5; εἶναι ὑ. τὸ αὐτὸ ὕψος Euc.11.29
, Archim.Sph.Cyl.1.19; ὑ. τὰν αὐτὰν γωνίαν subtending.., Id.Aren. 1.20 (cj.), cf. 21; αἱ γωνίαι ὑφ' ἃς αἱ ὁμόλογοι πλευραὶ ὑποτείνουσι Euc.6.6
,al.

3 of the logical subordination of things under a class, τῶν ἑτερογενῶν καὶ μὴ ὑπ' ἄλληλα τεταγμένων Arist.Cat. 1b16
, etc.; οἱ ὑ. τὸ ψεῦδος τεταγμένοι in the category of.., Luc.Ind.20.

II of subjection, control, dependence, never in Hom., once in Hdt., ὑ. βασιλέα δασμοφόρος 7.108
; ὑ. σφᾶς ποιεῖσθαι Th.4.60
, cf. Pl.R. 348d, Arist. HA 488a10, etc.; ἕως κα ᾖ ὑ. τὸν πατέρα Test.Epict.3.29
; ὑ. τιν' ἦν τῶν βασιλέων Men.340
; τί δ' οὐ κρατέοντος ὑπ' ἰσχύν; Call.Jov.75
, cf. 74; ὑ. Δία Γῆν Ἥλιον Sammelb. 5616
(i A.D.), POxy.722.6 (i/ii A.D.), etc. (v. ἥλιος 11.1
); ὑ. θεὸν καὶ ἄνθρωπον Michel854.52
(Halic., iii B.C.); τοῦ τοπαρχοῦντος ὑ. σέ PCair.Zen.322.3
(iii B.C.); στρατενσάμενον ὑ. ἄρχοντα Ἀντίοχον IG12(1).43.7
([place name] Rhodes); μηδὲ ὑ. δεσπότην ὤν LXXPr. 6.7
, cf. Ps.143.2; for ὑ. χεῖρα, v. χείρ; οἱ ὑ. τινά X.Cyr.3.3.6,8.8.5, etc.; τοῖς ὑφ' αὑτὸν τεταγμένοις GDI3750.75
([place name] Rhodes).

III of Time, in the course of, during, or to be left untranslated in English, ἐκέλευε Τοωσὶ ποτὶ πτόλιν ἡγήσασθαι νύχθ' ὕ. τήνδ' ὀλοήν Il.22.102
; ὑ. τὴν νύκτα ταύτην Hdt.9.51
, cf. 58; ὑ. τὴν πρώτην ἐπελθοῦσαν νύκτα ἀπέδρη Id 6.2; τῆς κολοκύνθης.. ἣ ἐγενήθη ὑ. νύκτα καὶ ὑ. νύκτα ἀπώλετο LXXJn.4.10
: rarely with stress on the duration, πάνθ' ὑ. μηνιθμόν throughout its continuance, Il.16.202; ὑ. τὸν παρεόντα τόνδε πόλεμον Hdt.9.60
; οὐδὲν τῶν κατ' Αἴγυπτον ὑ. ταῦτα ἑτεροιωθῆναι during that time, Id.2.142; ὑ. τὸν χρόνον ὃν οἱ ἑξήκοντα καὶ τριηκόσιοι ἦρχον οἵδε ἐθεόρεον IG12(8).276.4
([place name] Thasos).

2 also of Time, about, sts. more precisely at, and of events, about or at the time of, ὑπ' αὐτὸν τὸν χρόνον ὅτε .. Ar.Ach. 139, cf. Hdt.7.165; ὑπ' αὐτὸν τὸν καιρόν Plb. 11.27.4
, 16.15.8; ὑφ' ἕνα καιρόν at one time, Diog.Oen.38; ὑ. τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον Th.2.26
; ὑ. τοὺς αὐτοὺς χρόνους Id.1.100
; ὑ. τὸν σεισμόν Id.2.27
, cf. Plb.4.33.5, Plu.Alex.14; ὑ. τὴν ἑωθινήν, ὑ. τὴν ὄρφνην, Plb. 18.19.5,7; ὑ. τὸν ὄρθρον Act.Ap.5.21
, Gp.2.4.3; ποιεῖσθαι τοὺς περιπάτους ὑ. τὸ ψῦχος in the cool of the morning, Plb.5.56.10; ὑφ' ἓν πάντες all at once, at the same time, Arr.Epict.3.22.33, cf. S.E.M. 10.124, Sor.1.103, al.; παιδάριον ὑ. τὴν ἀναπνοὴν ἑπτὰ καὶ πέντε στίχους συνεῖρον in one breath, Plb.10.47.9; ὑφ' ἓν ἐκτρῖψαι at one blow, LXX Wi.12.9; ὑ. μίαν ἄρσιν καὶ θέσιν ἀνατείνοντες καὶ κατατιθέμενοι, of a squad of diggers, Gp.2.45.5; ὑ. μίαν φωνήν Aristeas 178; πῶς γὰρ ἂν ὑ. τὰς αὐτὰς ἡμέρας ἔν τε τῇ Ἰταλίᾳ καὶ ἐν τῇ Κιλικίᾳ.. πολεμήσειε; at the same time, D.C.36.35; sts. c. part., ὑ. τὸν νηὸν κατακαέντα at the time of its burning, Hdt.1.51; ὑ. τὴν κατάλυσιν τοῦ πολέμου just at the end, X.Mem.2.8.1, cf. Plu.Mar.46; ὑ. τὸν θυμὸν ἐκ χειρὸς ἐπιστρατευσαμένων at the very time of their anger, Plb. 2.19.10; ὑ. παροξυσμόν Gal.19.215
; παραδόντω τοῖς αἱρεθεῖσι εἰς τὸν ὑπ' αὐτὰ (or ὕπαυτα as Adv. = ἑξῆς) ἐνιαυτόν IG9(1).694.60
(Corc., ii/i B.C.); ὑ. κύνα Arist.HA 547a14
, Thphr.CP1.13.3, D.S.19.109; ὑ. τὰς θερινὰς [τροπὰς] καὶ τοῦ κυνὸς τὴν ἐπιτολήν Gp.2.6.17
.

IV of accompaniment, ὑπὸ ὄρχησίν τε καὶ ᾠδήν Pl.Lg. 670a
; ὑ. αὐλὸν διαλέγεσθαι X.Smp.6.3
codd. (ὑ. τοῦ αὐλοῦ Cobet); ὑ. κήρυκα (v. κῆρυξ 1.3
).—Compare A.11.5, B.11.4.

2 ὄνον ἕνα ὑ. λαχανόσπερμον laden with.., Meyer Ostr.81.2 (i A. D.), cf. PFay.p.324 (i A.D.); ὄνοι ὑ. δένδρα BGU 362i6
, al. (iii A.D.); cf. supr. A.11.8.

D POSITION: ὑ. can follow its Subst., becoming by anastrophe ὕπο. It is freq. separated from the Subst. by intervening words, as in Il.2.465, Od.5.320, 7.130:— ὑπαί is placed after its case in A. Eu. 417, S.El. 1418, Inach. l.c., although acc. to Hdn.Gr.1.480 it cannot suffer anastrophe.

E AS ADV., under, below, beneath, freq. in Hom.; esp. of young animals, under the mother, i.e. at the breast, Od.4.636, 21.23.

2 behind, Hdt.7.61: cf. C. 1.

II ὑπ' ἐκ or ὑπέκ, v. ὑπέκ.—In Hom. the separation of the Prep. from its Verb by tmesis is very freq., and sts. it follows, in which case it suffers anastrophe, φυγὼν ὕπο νηλεὲς ἦμαρ Od.9.17
.

F IN COMPOSITION:

I under, as well of rest as of motion, as in ὕπειμι, ὑποβαίνω, etc.

2 of the casing or covering of one thing with another, as ὑπάργυρος, ὑπόχρυσος.

3 of the agency or influence under which a thing is done, to express subjection or subordination, ὑποδαμνάω, ὑποδμώς, ὑφηνίοχος, cf. ἐπί G. 111.

II denoting what is in small degree or gradual, somewhat, a little, as in ὑποκινέω, ὑποδεής, ὑπόλευκος (so in tmesi, ὑ. τι ἀσεβῆ Pl.Phdr. 242d
, cf. Grg. 493c; ὑ. τι μικρὸν ἐπιθήκισα Ar.V. 1290
(lyr.)).

III underhand, secretly, as in ὑποθέω, ὑποθωπεύω, ὑποκορίζομαι, ὑπόρνυμι.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὑπό
4 ὑπό

ὑπό, ὑπαί (cf. sub): under. — I. adv., underneath, below, beneath, of motion or rest, ὑπὸ δὲ θρῆνυν ποσὶν (‘for the feet’) ἥσει, Il. 14.240; ὑπὸ δὲ θρῆνυς ποσὶν ἦεν, Od. 1.131; χεῦεν ὕπο ῥῶπας, Od. 16.47; often to indicate the position of parts of the body (in ‘plastic’ style as if one were looking at a picture up and down), ὑπὸ γούνατ' ἔλῦσεν (the knees ‘beneath him’), ὑπὸ δ' ἔτρεμε γυῖα, Il. 10.390; sometimes causal, thereunder, thereby, Od. 8.380, Il. 8.4; thus to denote accompaniment in music, λίνον δ' ὑπὸ κᾶλὸν ἄειδεν (to it, the harp), Il. 18.570, Od. 21.411. — II. prep., (1) w. gen., of position or motion; under, out or forth from under; ὑπ' ἀνθερεῶνος ἐλεῖν, κρήδεμνον ὑπὸ στέρνοιο τανύσσαι, Od. 5.346, and thus often w. verbs of hitting; ῥέει κρήνη ὑπὸ σπείους, ‘from beneath,’ Od. 9.141; then of agency, influence, by, through, in consequence of; δαμῆναι, θνήσκειν ὑπό τινος (‘at the hands of’), φεύγειν ὑπό τινος (‘before’), Il. 18.149 ; ὑπ' ἀνάγκης (‘from necessity,’ ‘perforce’), ὑπὸ δείους (‘for’), ὑπὸ φρῖκὸς Βορέω, Il. 23.692. — (2) w. dat., of position, under, and w. verbs of motion when the resulting position of rest is chiefly in mind, πίπτειν, τιθέναι τι ὑπό τινι, χ , Il. 16.378; instrumental or causal, under (not ‘by’ as w. the gen., but rather denoting subjection), ὑπὸ χερσί τινος θανέειν, ὀλέσαι ψῦχήν, γήραι ὕπο ἆρημένος, Od. 11.136; of power, mastery, δέδμητο λᾶὸς ὑπ' αὐτῷ, γ 3, Il. 24.636; and of accompanying circumstances, ὑπὸ πομπῇ (‘under the guidance’), πνοιῇ ὕπο (‘with the breeze’), Od. 4.402. — (3) w. acc., of motion (or extension), under, but often where the idea of motion is quite faint, ζώειν ὑπ' αὐγᾶς ἠελίοιο, thinking of the duration of life, Od. 15.349, Il. 5.267; of time, during, Il. 16.202, Il. 22.102.

A Homeric dictionary (Greek-English) (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ομηρικό λεξικό) > ὑπό
5 κλῆσις

κλῆσις, εως, ἡ (s. καλέω; Aristoph., X., Pla.; pap, LXX, TestSol, Philo, Just.; Tat. 15, 4).

① invitation to experience of special privilege and responsibility, call, calling, invitation. In our lit. almost exclusively of divine initiative (cp. κλῆσις, ἣν κέκληκεν [ὁ θεός] Epict. 1, 29, 49; s. also Maximus Tyr. 11, 11a) of the divine call, of the invitation to enter the kgdm. of God κ. ἐπουράνιος a heavenly (=divine) call Hb 3:1. ἡ κ. τοῦ θεοῦ the call that comes fr. God Ro 11:29; Lk 11:42 v.l. (Marcion’s rdg., accord. to Epiph.; the latter has κρίσις). ἵνα ἐνμίνωσι (=ἐμμείνωσι) τῇ πρὸς τὸν πατέρα κλήσι so that they might remain steadfast in their calling to the Father AcPl Ha 7, 33. ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς κλήσεως αὐτοῦ (=τοῦ θεοῦ) the hope to which God calls Eph 1:18. ἐλπὶς τῆς κ. ὑμῶν the hope that your calling brings you 4:4. ἡ ἄνω κ. τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ the upward call of God in Christ Phil 3:14; cp. 1 Cl 46:6. καλεῖν κλήσει ἁγίᾳ call with a holy calling 2 Ti 1:9; cp. Eph 4:1, 4 (cp. Orig., C. Cels. 3, 61, 21); ἀξιοῦν τινα τῆς κ. 2 Th 1:11 (s. ἀξιόω 1). ἡ κ. τινος the call that has come to someone (Orig., C. Cels. 2, 78, 5) 2 Pt 1:10. βλέπετε τὴν κ. ὑμῶν consider your call i.e., what happened when it occurred 1 Cor 1:26. κ. τῆς ἐπαγγελίας the calling of (i.e. that consists in) God’s promise B 16:9. Of baptism (s. HKoch, Die Bussfrist des Pastor Hermae: Festgabe für AvHarnack 1921, 175f) μετὰ τὴν κ. ἐκείνην τὴν μεγάλην καὶ σεμνήν after that great and sacred call Hm 4, 3, 6; ὁ κύριος θέλει τὴν κ. τὴν γενομένην διὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ σωθῆναι the Lord desires the salvation of those who are called through his Son Hs 8, 11, 1.—Cp. AcThom 50 (Aa II/2, 166, 17); ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν τῆς κλήσεως ‘by all those who are called’ Iren. 1, 4, 4 (Harv. I 136, 13); also Hippol., Ref. 6, 45, 3.

② position that one holds, position, condition (Libanius, Argumenta Orationum Demosth. 2: VIII 601, 6 F. τὴν τοῦ μαχαιροποιοῦ κλῆσιν ἔλαβεν=took up the occupation; idem Progymn. 9, 2, 1: VIII 290, 14 ἐν τῇ κλήσει ταύτῃ=in this characteristic, i.e. as Phrygians; Philo, Leg. ad Gai. 163 θεοῦ κλῆσισ=the position of a god [is a thing so sacred to the Alexandrians that they even give animals a share in it]) ἕκαστος ἐν τῇ κ. ᾗ ἐκλήθη, ἐν ταύτῃ μενέτω everyone is to remain in the (same) condition/position in which the person was when called (to salvation) 1 Cor 7:20.—For other perspectives s. KHoll, D. Gesch. des Wortes Beruf: SBBerlAk 1924, xxixff; ENorden, Antike Menschen im Ringen um ihre Berufsbestimmung: SBBerlAk ’32, p. xxxviiiff; WBieder, D. Berufung im NT ’61.—DELG s.v. καλέω. M-M. TW. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κλῆσις
6 ὅλος

ὅλος, η, ον(Pind.+ [Hom. and Hes. have the Ion. οὖλος]) in the NT never in attributive position, mostly predicate (W-S. §20, 12a; B-D-F §275, 2; 4; Rob. 774, cp. 656)

① pert. to being complete in extent, whole, entire, complete

ⓐ used w. a noun that has no art., somet. preceding it, somet. coming after it: ὅλ. οἴκους whole families Tit 1:11. ὅλ. ἄνθρωπον ὑγιῆ ἐποίησα I have healed a man’s whole body J 7:23.—ἐνιαυτὸν ὅλ. for a whole year Ac 11:26. διετίαν ὅλ. for two full years 28:30.—διʼ ὅλης νυκτός the whole night through Lk 5:5; J 21:6 v.l. (Appian, Liby. 134 §636; Lucian, Ver. Hist. 1, 29; Just., D. 1, 4.—SIG 1171, 6 διʼ ὅλης ἡμέρας; cp. Jos., Ant. 6, 37, Vi. 15 διʼ ὅλης τῆς νυκτός; InsPriene 112, 98 διὰ τοῦ χειμῶνος ὅλου). Likew. w. names of cities without the art. ὅλη Ἰερουσαλήμ all Jerusalem Ac 21:31.

ⓑ used w. a noun that has the art.

α. coming before the noun: ὅλ. ἡ περίχωρος ἐκείνη Mt 14:35; cp. GJs 8:3; AcPl Ha 8, 30. ὅλ. ἡ χώρα ἐκείνη Mk 6:55. ὅλ. ἡ πόλις 1:33. ὅλ. τὸ σῶμά σου Mt 5:29f; 6:22f. ὅλ. ὁ βίος Lk 8:43. [ἐφʼ] ὅλον τὸν οἶκον Ac 7:10. ὅλ. τὴν ἡμέραν the whole day (through) (Jos., Ant. 6, 22) Mt 20:6; Ro 8:36 (Ps 43:23); 10:21 (Is 65:2). ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος ἡμῶν with all our strength 1 Cl 33:8. εἰς ὅλην τὴν Γαλιλαίαν Mk 1:39; εἰς ὅλον τὸν κόσμον Hs 9, 25, 2 (ὅλ. ὁ κόσμος: Wsd 11:22; Aristobulus in Eus., PE 13, 12, 9 [Denis 224, 4; Holladay 176, 5]; EpArist 210; ApcEsdr 1:11 p. 25, 4 Tdf.). ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν καταγγέλλεται ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κόσμῳ Ro 1:8 (on the hyperbole cp. PLond 891, 9 ἡ εὐφημία σου περιεκύκλωσεν τὸν κόσμον ὅλον). ὅλον τὸ πλῆθος AcPl Ha 4, 20.

β. after the noun ὁ κόσμος ὅλ. Mt 16:26; Lk 9:25; 1J 5:19; AcPl Ha 3, 7 (TestJob 33:4; Just., D. 127, 2). τὸ συνέδριον ὅλ. Mt 26:59; τὸ σῶμά σου ὅλ. Lk 11:36a; ἡ οἰκία αὐτοῦ ὅλ. J 4:53; ἡ πόλις ὅλ. Ac 21:30; ἡ οἰκουμένη ὅλ. Rv 3:10.

γ. The noun can also be supplied fr. the context ἕως οὗ ἐζυμώθη ὅλον (i.e. τὸ ἄλευρον) until (the) whole (batch of flour) was leavened Mt 13:33; Lk 13:21. ἔσται φωτεινὸν ὅλον (i.e. τὸ σῶμά σου) Lk 11:36b.—Sim. the subst. ptc. ἔστιν καθαρὸς ὅλος (ὁ λελουμένος) (the one who has bathed) is clean all over J 13:10.

② pert. to a degree of completeness, wholly, completely, w. a pron. σὺ ὅλος you altogether, wholly J 9:34. τοῦτο ὅλον all this Mt 1:22; 21:4 v.l.; 26:56. ὅλον ἑαυτὸν ἐπιδείξας exposed himself completely (to the lion) AcPl Ha 4, 29.—W. a prep. διʼ ὅλου throughout, through and through (Philo Mech. 60, 25; POxy 53, 10; 1277, 8; PGM 5, 154) J 19:23 (cp. New Docs 3, 63, no. 26).

③ everything that exists, everything, subst. neut. pl. (3 Macc 6:9; EpArist 201; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 27 [Stone p. 54]; ApcMos, Philo, Joseph., Just., Tat., Ath.) [ὁ τῶν ὅλ]ων δεσπότης Ox 1081, 36 (as TestAbr A, s. above; ApcMos 37; Jos., Ant. 1, 72; Tat. 5, 1; cp. Just., D. 140, 4). ὁ θεὸς ὁ τῶν ὅλων ὁ παντοκράτωρ AcPlCor 2:9. ὁ … δεσπότης καὶ δημιουργὸς τῶν ὅλων Dg 8:7.—Cp. πᾶς, s. Schmidt, Syn. IV 549. B. 919. DELG. M-M. TW. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὅλος
7 τις

τις, [full] τι, Indef. Pron.

A any one, any thing, enclitic through all cases (for exceptions v. infr.):—but τίς; τί; Interrog. Pron. who? what?, oxyt. in the monosyll. cases, parox. in the others:—Dialectal forms: Cypr. σις ( si se) Inscr.Cypr.135.10 H.; Arc. σις (with <*> for ς) IG5(2).262.25 (Mantinea, v B.C.); Thess. κις ib.9(2).515.12 ([place name] Larissa), 1226.4, 1229.27 ([place name] Phalanna), pl. κινες ib.517.41 ([place name] Larissa), neut. κι in διεκί, ποκκί (qq.v.); neut. pl. [dialect] Dor. σά, [dialect] Boeot. τά, [dialect] Aeol. dat. τίω, τίοισι (v. infr. B). (I.-E. q[uglide]i-, cf. Lat. quis, quid, etc.; for σά, τά, v. ἄσσα, σά μάν; with τέο (v. infr. B) cf. OSlav. gen. c<*>eso.)

A Indef. Pron. τις, τι, gen. [dialect] Ion. τεο Od.16.305, Hdt.1.58; more freq. τευ Il.2.388, al., Hdt.4.30, al., Meliss.7, etc.; Trag. and [dialect] Att. του A.Pr.21, Ar.Ach. 329, Th.1.70, etc. (sts. fem., S.Aj. 290, OT 1107 (lyr.), E.Hec. 370, etc.); του is rare after 300 B.C., never in LXX or NT, but found in IG12(5).798.17 (Tenos, iii B.C.), PCair.Zen.250.6, 647.23 (iii B.C.), Plb.3.23.3, revived by the Atticists, D.H.8.29, Plu.Fab.20, etc.; τινος Pi.P.2.90, IG12.16.17, 65.41, A.Eu. 5, Ch. 102, S.Ant. 698, al., Hdt.2.109, al. (Rh.Mus.72.483), etc.; dat. [dialect] Ion. τεῳ Il.16.227
, Od.11.502, Hdt.2.48, 5.86; Trag. and [dialect] Att. τῳ (also in Hom., Il.1.299, 12.328, Od.13.308, 20.297, al., always in masc.) A.Th. 1045, IG12.39.54, D.S.18.45; as fem., A.Th. 472, S. OT80, etc.; τινι (Hom. in the form οὔ τινι Il.17.68
, Od.14.96) Pi. O.9.26, al., B.17.12, Hdt.1.114 (elsewh. fem., 2.62, 3.69, 83, 4.113), A.Th. 1041, S.Aj. 443, 495, etc.; acc. τινα Il.1.62, 5.761, etc., neut. τι 2.122, etc.: dual τινε Od.4.26, Pl.Sph. 237d, Prm. 143c, 149e: pl. τινες (Hom. only in οὔ τινες Od.6.279
, 17.587 and οἵτινες (v. ὅστις)); [dialect] Dor. τινεν SIG527.127 (Drerus, iii B.C.); nom. and acc. neut. τινα ( ὅτινα Il.22.450
), never in Trag., Ar., Th., or Hdt., f.l. in Isoc.4.74, first in Pl.Chrm. 163d, Ep. 325a, D.47.63, Hyp.Ath.19, Alex.110, Sotad.Com.1.22, Arist.EN 1094a5, IG42(1).121.35 (Epid., iv B.C.), etc.; ἄσσα (q.v.) Od.19.218, never in Trag. or Hdt.; [dialect] Att. ἄττα first in Th.1.113, 2.100, Ar.Ra. 173, al., Pl.R. 400a, etc., never in LXX, Plb., D.S., Str., revived by the Atticists, D.H.Comp.3, etc.; gen. [dialect] Ion. τεων Hdt.2.175, 5.57, τεῶν cj. for γε ῶν in 4.76; τινων not in Hdt., first in Ar.Eq. 977 (lyr.); dat. τισι, τισιν, first in Hdt. 9.113, X.Ath.1.18; N.-W. [dialect] Dor. τινοις GDI1409.5 (Delph., iii B.C.); [dialect] Ion. τεοισι Hdt.8.113, 9.27 (for τεοις and τεον v. τεός); acc. τινας Il.15.735, Od.11.371 (also in οὕστινας, ὅτινας, v. ὅστις), etc.; neut. τινα (v. supr.):—any one, any thing, some one, some thing; and as Adj. any, some, and serving as the Indef. Art. a, an; θεός νύ τίς ἐστι κοτήεις Il.5.191
; καί τις θεὸς ἡγεμόνευεν Od.9.142
; οὐδέ τις αὐτὸν ἠείδη δμώων ib. 205; ἤ τι ὀϊσάμενος, ἢ.. ib. 339; μή τίς μοι ὑποδείσας ἀναδύη ib. 377, cf. 405- 410; εἴ τινά που μετ' ὄεσσι λάβοι ib. 418, cf. 421, al.; τις θεός construed as if τις θεῶν, 19.40, cf. 11.502, IG12.94.19, E.Hel. 1039.

II special usages:

1 some one (of many), i.e. many a one, ὧδε δέ τις εἴπεσκεν Il.7.201
, etc.: sts. with meiosis, implying all or men, 13.638, Od.3.224; so in Prose, Hdt.5.49 fin., Th.2.37, etc.

2 any one concerned, every one, εὖ μέν τις δόρυ θηξάσθω Il.2.382
; ἀλλά τις αὐτὸς ἴτω let every man come himself, 17.254; ἵνα τις στυγέῃσι καὶ ἄλλος 8.515
, cf. 16.209, 17.227, al.; so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., even with the imper., τοῦτό τις.. ἴστω S Aj.417 (lyr.), cf. E.Ba. 346, Ar.Av. 1187; ἀγορεύω τινὶ ἐμὲ μὴ βασανίζειν Id.Ra. 628
; τοὺς ξυμμάχους αὐτόν τινα κολάζειν that every man should himself chastise his own allies, Th.1.40, cf. 6.77; ὅ τί τις ἐδύνατο Id.7.75
; ἄμεινόν τινος better than any others, D.21.66, cf. 19.35:—this is more fully expressed by adding other pronominal words, τις ἕκαστος Od.9.65
, Th.6.31, etc.; πᾶς τις A.Ag. 1205
, Hdt.6.80, Th.8.94, etc.; ἅπας τις Hdt.3.113
, etc.; οὐδέν τι μᾶλλον Id.4.118
. In these senses, τις is freq. combined with pl. words, οἱ κακοὶ.. οὐκ ἴσασι, πρίν τις ἐκβάλῃ, for πρὶν ἐκβάλωσι, S.Aj. 965; οἷς ἂν ἐπίω, ἧσσόν τις πρόσεισι, for ἧσσον προσίασι, Th.4.85; ἐτόλμα τις.., ὁρῶντες Id.2.53
, cf. 7.75; esp. after εἴ or ἤν τις, X. Mem.1.2.62, al.

3 in reference to a definite person, whom one wishes to avoid naming, οὐκ ἔφασαν ἰέναι, ἐὰν μή τις χρήματα διδῷ (i.e. Cyrus) Id.An.1.4.12, cf. Ar.Ra. 552, Theoc.5.122; so also euphem. for something bad, ἤν τι ποιῶμεν Th.2.74
; ἂν οὗτός τι πάθῃ D.4.11
: hence for the [ per.] 1st or [ per.] 2nd pers. Pron., ἅ τιν' οὐ πείσεσθαι ὀΐω Il.1.289
, cf. S.Ant. 751; ποῖ τις τρέψεται; for ποῖ τρέψομαι; Ar.Th. 603, cf. S.Aj. 245 (lyr.), 1138, Th.4.59, X.An.3.4.40, 5.7.31, etc.

4 indefinitely, where we say they, French on, sts. with an ironical force, φοβεῖταί τις A.Ch.59
(lyr.); μισεῖ τις ἐκεῖνον D.4.8
; as voc., τὸν Πλοῦτον ἔξω τις κάλει call P. out, somebody, Ar.Pl. 1196.

5 τις, τι may be opposed, expressly or by implication, to οὐδείς, οὐδέν, and mean somebody, something, by meiosis for some great one, some great thing, ηὔχεις τις εἶναι you boasted that you were somebody, E.El. 939; εἰσὶν ὅμως τινὲς οἱ εὐδοκιμοῦντες Arist.Pol. 1293b13
; τὸ δοκεῖν τιν' εἶναι Men.156
; τὸ δοκεῖν τινὲς εἶναι D.21.213
; ὡς σὲ μὲν ἐν τῇ πόλει δεῖ τινὰ φαίνεσθαι, τὴν πόλιν δ' ἐν τοῖς Ἕλλησι μηδενὸς ἀξίαν εἶναι Id.10.71
; κἠγών τις φαίνομαι ἦμεν after all I too am somebody, Theoc.11.79, cf. Act.Ap.5.36; also in neut., οἴονταί τι εἶναι ὄντες οὐδενὸς ἄξιοι Pl.Ap. 41e
, cf.Phd. 63c, Phdr. 243a, Euthd. 303c, etc.:— so τι λέγειν to be near the mark, opp. οὐδὲν λέγειν, Id.Prt. 339c, R. 329e, Phdr. 260a, etc.; ἵνα καὶ εἰδῶμεν εἴ τι ὅδε λέγει Id.Cra. 407e
; οἴεσθέ τι ποιεῖν, οὐδὲν ποιοῦντες Id.Smp. 173c
.

b τις is sts. opp. to another word, ἀελλοπόδων μέν τιν' εὐφραίνοισιν ἵππων τιμαί.., τέρπεται δὲ καί τις.. Pi.Fr. 221
; τισὶ τῶν πολιτῶν ἀποροῦσι συνεξέδωκε θυγατέρας.., τοὺς δ' ἐλύσατο ἐκ τῶν πολεμίων Lys.19.59
; μέρος μέν τι σιδήρου, μέρος δέ τι ὀστράκινον LXX Da.2.33
(more freq. with the Article, v. infr. 10 c); ἔστιν οὖν οὐ πᾶν τὸ ταχύ, ἀλλά τι (sic codd. BT) αὐτοῦ ἀγαστόν Pl.Cra. 412c
; ἀναγκαῖον ἤτοι πᾶσι τοῖς πολίταις ἀποδίδοσθαι πάσας ταύτας τὰς κρίσεις ἢ τισὶ πάσας.. ἢ τινὰς μὲν αὐτῶν πᾶσι τινὰς δὲ τισίν Arist.Pol. 1298a9
, cf. 1277a23; τὸ μεῖζον τοῦθ' ὅπερ ἐστὶν ἑτέρου λέγεται· τινὸς γὰρ λέγεται μεῖζον greater than something, Id.Cat. 6a38; τὸ πρώτως ὂν καὶ οὐ τὶ ὂν ἀλλ' ὂν ἁπλῶς Id.Metaph. 1028a30
; πότερον τῷ τυχόντι ἢ τισίν; Id.Pol. 1269a26.

6 with pr. names τις commonly signifies one named so-and-so, ἦν δέ τις ἐν Τρώεσσι Δάρης Il.5.9
, cf. X.An.3.1.4, etc.; with a sense of contempt, Θερσίτης τις ἦν there was one Thersites, S.Ph. 442.

b one of the same sort, converting the pr. name into an appellative, ἤ τις Ἀπόλλων ἢ Πάν an Apollo or a Pan, A.Ag.55 (anap.); [πόλιες] ταὶ μέλονται πρός τινος ἢ Διὸς ἢ γλαυκᾶς Ἀθάνας Lyr.in PVat.11v xi7; Σκύλλαν τινά A.Ag. 1233
, cf.Ar.V. 181, Av. 512, Ra. 912: so also ὥς τις ἥλιος A.Ag. 288
; ἰσθμόν τιν' Ar. Th. 647.

7 with Adjs. τις combines to express the idea of a Subst. used as predicate, ὥς τις θαρσαλέος καὶ ἀναιδής ἐσσι προΐκτης a bold and impudent beggar, Od.17.449, cf. 18.382, 20.140, Il.3.220; ἐγώ τις, ὡς ἔοικε, δυσμαθής a dull ard, Pl.R. 358a, cf. Prt. 340e; φόβου πλέα τις εἶ a cow ard, A.Pr. 696, cf. Th. 979(lyr.), Ag. 1140 (lyr.); ὡς ταχεῖά τις.. χάρις διαρρεῖ in what swift fashion ( = ταχέως πως), S.Aj. 1266, cf. OT 618, Hdt.4.198; δεινόν τι ποιεύμενος thinking it a terrible thing, Id.3.155, 5.33.

8 with numerals and Adjs. expressing number, size, or the like , εἷς δέ τις ἀρχὸς ἀνὴρ.. ἔστω some one man, Il.1.144; ἕνα τιν' ἂν καθεῖσεν Ar.Ra. 911
; δώσει δέ τι ἕν γε φέρεσθαι Od.15.83
; τινὰ μίαν νύκτα Th.6.61
; προσκαλεσάμενός τινας δύο τῶν ἑκατονταρχῶν Act.Ap.23.23
; sts. the τις softens the definiteness of the numeral, ἑπτά τινες some seven, seven or so, Th.7.34; ἐς διακοσίους τινάς Id.3.111
, cf. 7.87, 8.21; so without an actual numeral, ἡμέρας τινάς some days, i.e. several, Id.3.52; στρατῷ τινι of a certain amount, considerable, Id.8.3; ἐνιαυτόν τινα a year or so, Id.3.68; so οὐ πολλοί τινες, τινὲς οὐ πολλοί, A.Pers. 510, Th. 6.94, etc.; ὀλίγοι τινές or τινὲς ὀλίγοι Id.2.17
, 3.7; οὔ τινα πολλὸν χρόνον no very long time, Hdt.5.48; τις στρατιὰ οὐ πολλή Th.6.61
; so also ὅσσος τις χρυσός what a store of gold, Od.10.45, cf. Hdt. 1.193, 2.18, etc.; κόσοι τινές Id.7.234
; πηλίκαι τινὲς τιμωρίαι Isoc. 20.3
; πολλὸς γάρ τις ἔκειτο Il.7.156
; ἐκ πολλοῦ τευ χρόνου Hdt. 2.58
.

9 with Pronominal words, ἀλλά τί μοι τόδε θυμὸς.. μερμηρίζει something, namely this, Od.20.38, cf. 380; οἷός τις what sort of a man, Il.5.638 (dub. l.), cf. Od.9.348, 20.377, Pl.Prt. 313a, etc.; ποῖός τις S.Ant.42
, OC 1163, Hdt.3.34, X.An.7.6.24, etc.; ὁποῖός τις Id.Cyr.2.2.2
, al.; εὐτυχίη τις τοιήδε Hdt.3.139
, cf. X.Mem.1.1.1, etc.; τοιοῦτός τις Id.An.5.8.7
.

10 with the Article,

a when a noun with the Art. is in appos. with τις, as ὅταν δ' ὁ κύριος παρῇ τις when the person in authority, whoever he be, is here, S.OC 289; τοὺς αὐτοέντας.. τιμωρεῖν τινας (v.l. τινα) Id.OT 107.

b in Philosophic writers, τις is added to the Art. to show that the Art. is used to denote a particular individual who is not specified in the general formula, although he would be in the particular case, ὁ τὶς ἄνθρωπος the individual man (whoever he may be), this or that man, opp. ἄνθρωπος (man in general), ὁ τὶς ἵππος, ἡ τὶς γραμματική, Arist.Cat. 1b4, 8; τὸ τὶ μέγεθος, opp. ὅλως τὸ μέγεθος, Id.Pol. 1283a4, cf. S.E.P.2.223; but in ἑνὸς γὰρ τό γε τὶ φήσεις σημεῖον εἶναι Pl.Sph. 237d
, the Art. is used as in Il. cc. s.v. ὁ, ἡ, τό B.1.5
: later ὅ τις (or ὁ τὶς ) much like ὁ δεῖνα, δεῦρο ὅ τις θεός, ὄφθητί μοι in a general formula of invocation, PMag.Par.1.236; αἴρω σε, ἥ τις βοτάνη ib.287; εἰς τήν τινα κρείαν (leg. χρείαν) ib.289.

c freq. in opposed clauses, ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δὲ.. E.Med. 1141
, Hec. 624, Pl.Phd. 99b, etc.; ὁ μέν τις.., ἄλλος δὲ.. E.IT 1407
; ὁ μὲν.., ὁ δέ τις.. X.Cyr.1.4.15
: pl., οἱ μέν τινες.., οἱ δὲ.. Hdt.1.127
, cf. Th.2.91; οἱ μέν τινες.., οἱ δὲ.., οἱ δέ τινες X.Cyr.3.2.10
, etc.; οἱ μὲν.., οἱ δέ τινες.. ib.6.1.26, etc.: also combined with other alternative words, ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δέ τις.., ἕτερος δέ τις.. Id.Smp.2.6
; ὁ μὲν.., ἕτερος δέ τις.., ὁ δὲ.. , etc., Ar. Pl. 162 sq.: also in neut., τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δέ τι.. Pl.Ep. 358a
; τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δὲ.. Hdt.3.40
; in adverb. sense, τὸ μὲν.., τὸ δέ τι.. partly.., partly.., Plb.1.73.4; and τι remains unaltered even when the Art. is pl., τὰ μέν τι μαχόμενοι, τὰ δὲ καὶ ἀναπαυόμενοι X.An.4.1.14
, cf. HG7.1.46; also τὸ δέ τι.. but in some measure.., without τὸ μέν preceding, Th.1.107, cf. 118, 7.48.

d later τις is used as in b supr. but without the Art., γράψον.. ὅτι τι καί τι εἴληφας that you have received such and such things, POxy.937.22 (iii A.D.); κληρονόμους καταλείπω τὴν θυγατέρα μού τινα καὶ τὸν σύντροφον αὐτῆς τινα καί τινα ib.1034.2 (ii A.D.); τίς τινι χαίρειν A to B greeting (in a draft letter), ib. 509 (ii A.D.).

II the neut. τι is used,

a collectively, ἦν τι καὶ ἐν ταῖς Συρακούσαις there was a party.., Th.7.48; so perh. τῶν ἄλλων οὔ πέρ τι πεφυγμένον ἐστ' Ἀφροδίτην, οὔτε θεῶν, οὔτ' ἀνθρώπων no class, h.Ven.34 (but masc. τις in h.Merc. 143).

b euphem. for something bad, v. supr. 3.

c joined with Verbs, somewhat, in any degree, at all, ἦ ῥά τί μοι κεχολώσεαι Il.5.421
; παρεθάρρυνέ τι αὐτούς X.HG6.4.7
, etc.: with Adjs. or Adverbs, οὕτω δή τι ἰσχυραί, οὕτω δή τι πολύγονον, etc., Hdt.3.12, 108, cf. 4.52; so also ὀλίγον τι ἧσσον Od.15.365
; οὐδέ τι μᾶλλον Hdt.6.123
, etc.; ἧσσόν τι Th.3.75
, etc.; οὐ πάνυ τι, πολύ τι, σχεδόν τι, v. πάνυ 1.3, πολύς 111.1a
, 2a, σχεδόν IV; also in conjunction with οὐδέν, μηδέν, οὐδέν τι πάντως Hdt.6.3
; οὐδέν, μηδέν τι μᾶλλον, E.Alc. 522, S.Aj. 280; μηδέν τι λίαν E.Andr. 1234
:—also καί τι καὶ.. ὑποψίᾳ in part also from suspicion, Th.1.107; καί πού τι καί Pi.O.1.28
.

12 τίς τε freq. in Hom., ὡς ὅτε τίς τε Il.3.33
, 4.141, v. τε B.

13 ἤ τις ἢ οὐδείς few or none, next to none, Hdt.3.140, X.Cyr.7.5.45, D.C.47.5, 48.4; ἤ τι ἢ οὐδέν little or nothing, Pl.Ap. 17b; ἢ οὐδεὶς ἤ τις D.C.41.62
(s. v.l.).

14 τις is pleonast. in such phrases as οὐδέν τι or μηδέν τι, v. supr. 11c.

b repeated in successive clauses, ὅσα λέγει τις ἢ πράσσειτις ἢψέγειν ἔχει S.Ant. 689
; εἴ τις δύο ἢ καὶ πλέους τις ἡμέρας λογίζεται Id.Tr. 944
(where however κἄτι πλείους is prob. cj.), cf. E.Or. 1218 (whereas τις is sts. omitted in the first clause, οὔτε φωνὴν οὔτε του μορφὴν βροτῶν A.Pr.21
, cf. S.Tr.3): but in E.Andr. 734, ἔστι γάρ τις οὐ πρόσω.. πόλις τις, the repetition is pleonastic, as also in A.Supp.57 sq. (lyr., s. v.l.).

15 τις is sts. omitted, οὐδέ κεν ἔνθα τεόν γε μένος καὶ χεῖρας ὄνοιτο (sc. τις) Il.13.287; ὡς δ' ἐν ὀνείρῳ οὐ δύναται (sc. τις) φεύγοντα διώκειν 22.199
, cf. S.OC 1226 (lyr.), Leg.Gort.2.2, X.Smp.5.2, Pl.Grg. 456d: τις must often be supplied from what goes before, ib. 478c, Prt. 319d.

b sts. also τις is omitted before a gen. case which must depend upon it, as ἢ [τις] τᾶς ἀσώτου Σισυφιδᾶν γενεᾶς S.Aj. 189
(lyr.); ἢν γαμῇ ποτ' αὐτὸς ἢ [τις] τῶν ξυγγενῶν Ar.Nu. 1128
; ἐν τῶν πόλεων IG12.56.14
.--Cf. ὅστις, οὔτις, μήτις, ἄλλο τι.

III Accentuation and position of τις:

1 accentuation: τις is normally enclitic, but in certain uses is orthotone, i.e. theoretically oxytone (τίς, τινά, τινές, τινῶν, etc., cf. Choerob. in Theod.1.373 H.) and barytone when followed by another word ( τὶς or τις, τινὰ, τινὲς, τινῶν, etc.). According to Sch. D.T.p.240 H. its orthotone accent is τίς (not τὶς) , τίνα, τίνες, etc. The orthotone form is used in codd.:

a at the beginning of a sentence, τίς ἔνδον.. ; is any one within? A.Ch. 654 ( τὶς cj. Hermann); τί φημι; = λέγω τι; am I saying anything? S.Tr. 865, OT 1471; <τίς ἦλθε;> ἦλθέ τις has anybody come? Somebody has come, Sch.D.T. l.c.; τὶς κάθηται, τὶς περιπατεῖ, so and so is sitting (walking), S.E.M.8.97; τὶς αἰπόλος καλούμενος Κομάτας Sch.Theoc.7.78; τίς ποτε οἰκοδεσπότης.. ἐκοπία Aesop.
in Gloss. iii p.41; or after a pause, πῶς γὰρ ἄν, ἔφην ἐγώ, ὦ βέλτιστε, τὶς ἀποκρίναιτο Pl.R. 337e
; τι οὖν ([etym.] τὶς ἂν εἴποι) ταῦτα λέγεις; D.1.14 (v.l.); ἔντοσθεν δὲ γυνά, τι θεῶν δαίδαλμα Theoc.1.32
; οὐ γυμνὸν τὸ φίλαμα, τι δ' ὦ ξένε καὶ πλέον ἑξεῖς Mosch.1.5
(v.l. for τὺ).

b when τις is opp. to another τις or to some other word, τισὶ μὲν συμφέρει, τισὶ δ' οὐ συμφέρει Arist.Pol. 1284b40
, cf. Th.2.92, Pl.Cri. 49a, D. 9.2; τινὲς μὲν οὖν.., ἡμεῖς δὲ.. Sor.1.1
; τὸ τὶ μὲν ψεῦδος ἔχον, τὶ δὲ ἀληθές S.E.M.8.127
; ἀλλὰ τινὰ μὲν.., τινὰ δὲ.. Gem.14.6
; ποτὲ μὲν πρὸς πάντα, ποτὲ δὲ πρὸς τινά Sor.1.48
: without such opposition, τοῦτ' εἰς ἀνίαν τοὔπος ἔρχεται τινί for a certain person, S.Aj. 1138. Codd. are not consistent; in signf.11.5a, 10c, 13 they make it enclitic; in signf. 11.5b sts. enclitic, sts. orthotone (v. supr.); sts. enclitic and orthotone in the same sentence, πάντα δὲ τὰ γιγνόμενα ὑπό τέ τινος γίγνεται καὶ ἔκ τινος καὶ τί Arist.Metaph. 1032a14
, cf. Pl.Chrm. 165c.

2 position:

a τις is rarely first word in the sentence, and rarely follows a pause (v. supr. 111.1a, b); it may stand second word, ἔσκε τις ἐνθάδε μάντις ἀνήρ Od.9.508
, cf. Il.8.515, 23.331; but in general its position is not far before or after the word to which it belongs in sense, ἀλλ' ἄγε δή τινα μάντιν ἐρείομεν 1.62
; φυλακὴ δέ τις ἔμπεδος ἔστω 8.521
.

b in [dialect] Ion. Prose it sts. stands between its genitive and the Article of that genitive, τῶν τις Περσέων Hdt.1.85
; τῶν τις ἱρέων Id.2.38
; τῶν τινες Φοινίκων Id.8.90
; ἐς τῶν τι ἄλλο στομάτων τοῦ Νείλου Id.2.179
; so also in late Prose, Ath.3.108d, Eust.1402.18, 1659.27, 1676.1.

c it stands between the Art. and Subst. in signf.11.10b.

d τίς τι is the correct order, not τί τις, IG12.110.46, Th.7.10, X.An.4.1.14 (codd. dett.), D.22.22, etc.

e whereas in [dialect] Att. the order ἐάν τις is compulsory, in [dialect] Dor. the usual order is αἴ τίς κα, Leg.Gort.9.43, al., Tab.Heracl.1.105, al. (but αἴ κά τις Epich.35
, 159; αἰ δέ κα μή τις Leg.Gort.5.13
): later [dialect] Dor. εἴ τί κα GDI2101.3
, al.; καἴ τι ἂν ( = καὶ εἴ τι ἂν) IG5(1).1390.50 (Andania, i B.C., v. infr. B.11.1b):—this [dialect] Dor. order influenced the Koine, as in the rare εἴ τις ἂν Plu.TG15
.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τις
8 ι̌̄̒μάς

ι̌̄̒μάς, αντος: leather strap or thong. — (1) in connection with the chariot, (a) straps in which the chariot - box was hung, or perhaps more likely the network of plaited straps enclosing the body of the chariot, Il. 5.727; (b) the reins, Il. 23.324, 363; (c) the halter, Il. 8.544.— (2) the chin-strap of a helmet, Il. 3.371.— (3) the cestus of boxers, see πυγμάχοι.— (4) the leash or latchstring by which doors were fastened. See adjacent cut, in four divisions: above, the closed, below the unfastened door; on the left, as seen from the inner side, on the right as seen from the outside. To close the door from the outside, the string, hanging loosely in fig. 1, was pulled until it drew the bolt from the position of fig. 2 to that of fig. 3, when it was made fast by a knot to the ring, κορώνη, e, fig. 4. To open from the outside, the string was first untied, and then the κληίς, not unlike a hook (fig. 4, f), was introduced through the key-hole, c, and by means of a crook (g, fig. 3) at the end of it the bolt was pushed back from the position of fig. 3 to that of fig. 2, and the door opened, Od. 1.442.— (5) for a bed - cord, Od. 23.201.— (6) the magic girdle of Aphrodīte, Il. 14.214, 219. — (7) a thong to make a drill revolve, Od. 9.385. (See cut No. 121.)

A Homeric dictionary (Greek-English) (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ομηρικό λεξικό) > ι̌̄̒μάς
9 καθαρίζω

καθαρίζω (s. next entry; also καθερίζω; s. B-D-F §29, 1; W-S. §5, 20c; Mlt-H. 67) Attic fut. καθαριῶ (Hb 9:14; J 15:2 D; B-D-F §101 s.v. καθαίρειν; s. Mlt-H. 218); 3 sg.-ίσει (Num 30:13 cod. B; Mal 3:3) 1 aor. ἐκαθάρισα, impv. καθάρισον. Pass.: fut. καθαρισθήσομαι LXX; 1 aor. ἐκαθαρίσθην (also ἐκαθερίσθην: Mt 8:3b v.l.; Mk 1:42 v.l.), impv. καθαρίσθητι; pf. 3 sg. κεκαθάρισται (1 Km 20:26; TestJob 43:17), ptc. κεκαθαρισμένος. See Reinhold 38f; Thackeray 74. (H. Gk. substitute for the st. καθαίρω: as agricultural t.t. PLond I 131 recto, 192 p. 175 [78/79 A.D.]; PStras 2, 11; PLips 111, 12. In the ritual sense, mystery ins fr. Andania=SIG 736, 37; likew. 1042, 3; Jos., Ant. 10, 70; 11, 153; 12, 286; Just., Mel., P. 72, 526. The word is also found BGU 1024 IV, 16; EpArist 90 and in var. mngs. in LXX; En 10:20, 22; TestJob; TestReub 4:8; TestLevi 14:6.—Dssm., NB 43f [BS 216f]; in var. senses ‘cleanse, clear [as of an area], purify’)

① to make physically clean, make clean, cleanse τί someth. Mt 23:25f; Lk 11:39. The much-discussed passage καθαρίζων πάντα τὰ βρώματα Mk 7:19 may belong here (so BWeiss; HHoltzmann; Schniewind), but s. 3a below.

② to heal a person of a disease that makes one ceremonially unclean, make clean, heal esp. leprosy

ⓐ τινά make someone clean Mt 8:2; 10:8; Mk 1:40; Lk 5:12; AcPl Ha 8, 36/BMM verso 10; s. also BMM verso 12 and 39 (Mel., P. 72, 526 τοὺς λεπρούς). Pass. (Lev 14:7 al.) Mt 11:5; Mk 1:42; Lk 4:27; 7:22; 17:14, 17; PEg² 37; καθαρίσθητι (cp. 4 Km 5:13) be clean! Mt 8:3a; Mk 1:41; Lk 5:13; 17:14 v.l.; PEg² 38.

ⓑ τί remove someth. by or for the purpose of purification (cp. Od. 6, 93 καθαίρειν ῥύπα; Epict. 2, 16, 44; 3, 24, 13) pass. ἐκαθαρίσθη αὐτοῦ ἡ λέπρα his leprosy disappeared Mt 8:3b.

③ to purify through ritual cleansing, make clean, declare clean

ⓐ a Levitical cleansing of foods make clean, declare clean (cp. Lev 13:6, 23) ἃ ὁ θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν Ac 10:15; 11:9. Many (Origen; Field, Notes 31f; et al.) prefer to take καθαρίζων πάντα τ. βρώματα Mk 7:19 (s. 1 above) in this sense, regarding the words as an observation of the evangelist or a marginal note by a reader: he (Jesus) (hereby) declares all foods clean.—WBrandt, Jüd. Reinheitslehre u. ihre Beschreibung in den Evang. 1910.

ⓑ of moral and cultic cleansing

α. cleanse, purify fr. sin (LXX) τινά or τί: (τὰς ψυχάς Hippol., Ref. 10, 14, 10) τὴν καρδίαν Hs 6, 5, 2. τὰς καρδίας v 3, 9, 8. χεῖρας Js 4:8; ἑαυτούς Hs 8, 7, 5; τὸ ἐντὸς τ. ποτηρίου the contents of the cup, which must not be acquired in a sinful manner, nor used for a sinful purpose Mt 23:26. ἐλθέτω τὸ ἅγ. πνεῦμά σου ἐφʼ ἡμᾶς κ. καθαρισάτω ἡμᾶς let your Holy Spirit come upon us and make us pure Lk 11:2 v.l. In parable τοὺς λίθους Hs 9, 7, 2 and 6; 9, 8, 4.—Pass. Hv 4, 3, 4. ἅπαξ κεκαθαρισμένους Hb 10:2. καθαρισθήσεται ἡ ἐκκλησία Hs 9, 18, 2; cp. 3. καθαρισθήσομαι 1 Cl 18:7 (Ps 50:9).—τινὰ (τὶ) ἀπό τινος (on the constr. w. ἀπό s. the two pass. fr. SIG at the beg. of that entry; Lev 16:30 καθαρίσαι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τ. ἁμαρτιῶν; Ps 18:14; 50:4; Sir 23:10; 38:10 and oft.; En 10:20, 22; PsSol 10:1; 17:22; Jos., Ant. 12, 286; TestReub 4:8; Just., D. 116, 2) κ. τινὰ ἀπὸ πάσης ἁμαρτίας 1J 1:7; cp. vs. 9; 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:4). κ. ἑαυτὸν ἀπὸ μολυσμοῦ σαρκός cleanse oneself from defilement of the body 2 Cor 7:1. ἀπὸ τῆς λύπης Hm 10, 3, 4. ἀπὸ πάσης ἐπιθυμίας Hs 7:2. τῶν πονηριῶν 8, 11, 3; ἀπὸ τούτου τοῦ δαιμονίου 9, 23, 5. κ. τὴν καρδίαν ἀπὸ τῆς διψυχίας cleanse the heart of doubt m 9:7. ἀπὸ τῶν ματαιωμάτων from vanities 9:4. κ. ἑαυτῶν τὰς καρδίας ἀπὸ τῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν 12, 6, 5. κ. τὴν συνείδησιν ἡμῶν ἀπὸ νεκρῶν ἔργων Hb 9:14. Pass. καθαρίζεσθαι ἀπὸ τ. ἁμαρτιῶν Hv 2, 3, 1; ἀπὸ τ. ὑστερημάτων 3, 2, 2a; cp. b and 3, 8, 11.—κ. τινά (τί) τινι (dat. of instr.): τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας (i.e. God) τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν Ac 15:9. Of Christ and the community of Christians καθαρίσας τῷ λουτρῷ τοῦ ὕδατος ἐν ῥήματι Eph 5:26 (OCasel, Jahrb. für Liturgiewiss. 5, 1925, 144ff). Of Christ and baptism ἵνα τῷ πάθει τὸ ὕδωρ καθαρίσῃ so that through (his) suffering he might purify the water IEph 18:2.—καθάρισον ἡμᾶς τὸν καθαρισμὸν τῆς σῆς ἀληθείας purify us w. the cleansing of your truth 1 Cl 60:2.—Of Christ and Christians κ. ἑαυτῷ λαὸν περιούσιον Tit 2:14.—PEg³ 57f.

β. remove by or for the purpose of purification τὶ someth. (s. 2b and cp. Dt 19:13; κεκαθάρισται ἡμῶν ἡ ἀνομία TestJob 43:17) τὰς ἁμαρτίας τινός Hs 5, 6, 2f.

ⓒ Hb 9:22f occupies an intermediate position, since ceremon. purification and moral purification merge, and the former becomes the shadow-image of the latter.

ⓓ set free τινά τινος someone from someth. 1 Cl 16:10 (Is 53:10).—DELG s.v. καθαρός. M-M. EDNT. TW.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > καθαρίζω
10 κατά

κατά (Hom.+) prep. (s. the lit. s.v. ἀνά beg., also LfgrE s.v. κατά 1346; with the gen. 74 times in NT; w. acc. 391 times in NT).

A. w. the gen.

① marker of extension or orientation in space or specific area

ⓐ of location that is relatively lower, down from someth. (Hom. et al.; LXX; Ath. 1, 4 κ. κόρρης προπηλακίζειν=to smack on one side of the head) ὁρμᾶν κ. τοῦ κρημνοῦ rush down (from) the bank (cp. Polyb. 38, 16, 7 κ. τῶν κρημνῶν ῥίπτειν; Jos., Bell. 1, 313) Mt 8:32; Mk 5:13; Lk 8:33. κ. κεφαλῆς ἔχειν have someth. on one’s head (lit. hanging down fr. the head, as a veil. Cp. Plut., Mor. 200f ἐβάδιζε κ. τῆς κεφαλῆς ἔχων τὸ ἱμάτιον.; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 499, 5 of a mummy ἔχων τάβλαν κ. τοῦ τραχήλου) 1 Cor 11:4.

ⓑ of position relatively deep, into someth. (Od. 9, 330 κ. σπείους ‘into the depths of the cave’; Hdt. 7, 235; X., An. 7, 1, 30) ἡ κ. βάθους πτωχεία extreme (lit. ‘reaching down into the depths’; cp. Strabo 9, 3, 5 [419] ἄντρον κοῖλον κ. βάθους) or abysmal poverty 2 Cor 8:2. This may perh. be the mng. of πλήσσειν τινὰ κ. τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν strike someone deep into the eyes ApcPt 11:26 (cp. Demosth. 19, 197 ξαίνει κ. τοῦ νώτου; PPetr II, 18 [2b], 15 [246 B.C.] ἔτυπτεν αὐτὸν κ. τοῦ τραχήλου).—κ. γαστρός Just., D. 78, 3 for ἐν γαστρί Mt 1:18 (cp. Ath. 35, 2 τὸ κ. γαστρὸς ζῶον εἶναι).

ⓒ extension in various directions within an area, throughout (so in Luke’s writings; Polyb. 3, 19, 7 κ. τῆς νήσου διεσπάρησαν; PGiss 48, 8 κ. κυριακῆς γῆς; Jos., Ant. 8, 297; SibOr 3, 222; 4, 24; 5, 305) γνωστὸν γενέσθαι καθʼ ὅλης Ἰόππης become known throughout all Joppa Ac 9:42. καθʼ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας 9:31; 10:37; Lk 23:5. φήμη ἐξῆλθεν καθʼ ὅλης τῆς περιχώρου 4:14.

② down upon, toward, against someone or someth, fig. ext. of 1.

ⓐ w. verbs of swearing, to denote what one swears by (Thu. 5, 47, 8; Lysias 32, 13; Isaeus 7, 28; Demosth. 21, 119; 29, 26; SIG 526, 4ff; 685, 25; UPZ 110, 39 [164 B.C.]; BGU 248, 13; Jdth 1:12; Is 45:23; 2 Ch 36:13) by ἐξορκίζειν (q.v.) Mt 26:63. ὀμνύναι (q.v.) Hb 6:13, 16. ὁρκίζειν (q.v.) Hs 9, 10, 5. Sim. ἐρωτᾶν κ. τινος request, entreat by someone Hv 3, 2, 3.

ⓑ in a hostile sense, against

α. after verbs that express hostile action, etc. διχάζειν Mt 10:35. ἐπαίρεσθαι 2 Cor 10:5. ἰσχύειν Ac 19:16. κακοῦν 14:2. στρατεύεσθαι 1 Pt 2:11. φυσιοῦσθαι 1 Cor 4:6

β. after words and expressions that designate hostile speech, esp. an accusation ἔχειν (τι) κ. τινος have or hold someth. against someone Rv 2:4, 14, 20. φέρειν J 18:29. ἐγκαλεῖν Ro 8:33. ἐντυγχάνειν τινὶ κ. τινος 11:2 (TestJob 17:5). κατηγορεῖν Lk 23:14. ποιεῖν κρίσιν Jd 15a. τὸ κ. ἡμῶν χειρόγραφον the bond that stands against us Col 2:14. ἐμφανίζειν Ac 24:1; 25:2. αἰτεῖσθαί τι 25:3, 15. αἱ κ. τινος αἰτίαι vs. 27. εἰπεῖν πονηρόν Mt 5:11 (cp. Soph., Phil. 65 κακὰ λέγειν κ. τινος. X., Hell. 1, 5, 2; Isocr., C. Nic. 13; Plut., Mor. 2a λέγειν κ.; SIG 1180, 1 λέγειν κ. τινος; Just., A I, 23, 3; 49, 6 κ. τῶν … ὁμολογούντων). λαλεῖν ῥήματα Ac 6:13; cp. Jd 15b (TestDan 4:3; JosAs 23:15). μαρτυρεῖν κ. τ. θεοῦ give testimony in contradiction to God 1 Cor 15:15. ζητεῖν μαρτυρίαν κ. τινος testimony against someone Mk 14:55. ψευδομαρτυρεῖν 14:56f. ψευδομαρτυρία Mt 26:59. γογγύζειν 20:11. στενάζειν Js 5:9. διδάσκειν Ac 21:28. συμβούλιον διδόναι (ποιεῖν v.l.) Mk 3:6; ς. λαβεῖν Mt 27:1. ψεύδεσθαι Js 3:14 (Lysias 22, 7; X., Ap. 13; Ath. 35, 1 καθʼ ἡμῶν … κατεψεύσατο).

γ. after expressions that designate such a position or state of mind in a different way εἶναι κ. τινος be against someone (opp. ὑπέρ) Mk 9:40 (WNestle, ZNW 13, 1912, 84–87; AFridrichsen, ibid., 273–80); Ro 8:31; (opp. μετά) Mt 12:30; Lk 11:23. δύνασθαί τι κ. τινος be able to do someth. against someone 2 Cor 13:8. ἔχειν τι κ. τινος have someth. against someone (in one’s heart) Mt 5:23; Mk 11:25; Hs 9, 24, 2; cp. ibid. 23, 2, where the acc. is to be supplied. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν J 19:11. ἐπιθυμεῖν Gal 5:17. μερίζεσθαι καθʼ ἑαυτῆς Mt 12:25. Cp. 1 Cl 39:4 (Job 4:18).—κατά prob. means against also in ἔβαλεν κατʼ αὐτῆς ἄνεμος Ac 27:14. ἐτελείωσαν κ. τ. κεφαλῆς αὐτῶν τὰ ἁμαρτήματα they completed the full measure of sins against their own head GPt 5:17.

B. w. acc. (so in the NT 399 times [besides καθʼ εἷς and κατὰ εἷς])

① marker of spatial aspect

ⓐ of extension in space, along, over, through, in, upon (Hom. et al.; OGI 90, 7 ἐκ τῶν κ. τ. χώραν ἱερῶν; PHib 82, 19; PTebt 5, 188; LXX; Just.; Mel., HE 4, 26, 5) Ac 24:12. καθʼ ὅλην τ. πόλιν throughout the city Lk 8:39 (cp. Diod S 4, 10, 6 καθʼ ὅλην τὴν Ἐλλάδα). ἐγένετο λιμὸς κ. τὴν χώραν ἐκείνην 15:14. κ. τὰς κώμας 9:6. κ. πόλεις καὶ κώμας 13:22 (Appian., Maced. 9 §1 and 4 κ. πόλεις; Just., A I, 67, 3 κ. πόλεις ἢ ἀγρούς).—κ. τόπους in place after place Mt 24:7; Mk 13:8; Lk 21:11 (Theophr., περὶ σημ. 1, 4 p. 389 W.; Cat. Cod. Astr. III 28, 11 ἐν μέρει τ. ἀνατολῆς κ. τόπους, VIII/3, 186, 1 λιμὸς καὶ λοιμὸς καὶ σφαγαὶ κ. τόπους). οἱ ὄντες κ. τὴν Ἰουδαίαν those throughout Judea or living in Judea Ac 11:1. διασπαρῆναι κ. τὰς χώρας τῆς Ἰουδαίας be scattered over the regions of Judea 8:1. κ. τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν in the congregation there 13:1. τοῖς κ. τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν καὶ Συρίαν καὶ Κιλικίαν ἀδελφοῖς 15:23. τοὺς κ. τὰ ἔθνη Ἰουδαίους the Judeans (dispersed) throughout the nations 21:21. τοῖς κ. τὸν νόμον γεγραμμένοις throughout the law = in the law 24:14b. κ. τὴν ὁδόν along or on the way (Lucian, Catapl. 4; Jos., Ant. 8, 404) Lk 10:4; Ac 25:3; 26:13. τὸ κ. Κιλικίαν καὶ Παμφυλίαν πέλαγος the sea along the coast of Cilicia and Pamphylia 27:5; but the geographical designation τὰ μέρη τ. Λιβύης τῆς κ. Κυρήνην 2:10 prob. belongs to b: the parts of Libya toward Cyrene.

ⓑ of extension toward, toward, to, up to ἐλθεῖν (γίνεσθαι v.l.) κ. τὸν τόπον come up to the place (Jos., Vi. 283) Lk 10:32. ἐλθόντες κ. τὴν Μυσίαν to Mysia Ac 16:7; cp. 27:7. πορεύεσθαι κ. μεσημβρίαν (s. μεσημβρία 2) toward the south 8:26 (cp. Jos., Bell. 5, 505). κ. σκοπὸν διώκειν run (over the course) toward the goal Phil 3:14. λιμὴν βλέπων κ. λίβα καὶ κ. χῶρον a harbor open to the southwest and northwest Ac 27:12 (s. βλέπω 8).—κ. πρόσωπον to the face (cp. Jos., Ant. 5, 205) Gal 2:11. ἔχειν τινὰ κ. πρόσωπον meet someone face to face (Thieme 19 has reff. for the use of κατὰ πρόσωπον as a legal formula) Ac 25:16. κ. πρόσωπον ταπεινός humble when personally present 2 Cor 10:1. κ. πρόσωπόν τινος in the presence of someone Lk 2:31; Ac 3:13. τὰ κ. πρόσωπον what lies before one’s eyes, i.e. is obvious 2 Cor 10:7. κ. ὀφθαλμοὺς προγράφειν portray before one’s eyes Gal 3:1.

ⓒ of isolation or separateness, by (Thu. 1, 138, 6 οἱ καθʼ ἑαυτοὺς Ἕλληνες ‘the Greeks by themselves’; Polyb. 1, 24, 4; 5, 78, 3; 11, 17, 6; Diod S 13, 72, 8; Gen 30:40; 43:32; 2 Macc 13:13; Philo, Migr. Abr. 87; 90; Just., D. 4, 5 αὐτὴ καθʼ ἑαυτήν γενομένη; Tat. 13, 1 ἡ ψυχὴ καθʼ ἑαυτήν; Ath. 15, 2 ὁ πηλὸς καθʼ ἑαυτόν) ἔχειν τι καθʼ ἑαυτόν keep someth. to oneself Ro 14:22 (cp. Jos., Ant. 2, 255; Heliod. 7, 16, 1). καθʼ ἑαυτὸν μένειν live by oneself of the private dwelling of Paul in Rome Ac 28:16. πίστις νεκρὰ καθʼ ἑαυτήν faith by itself is dead Js 2:17 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 3, 43 τὸ σῶμα καθʼ αὑτὸ νεκρόν ἐστιν). ἡ κατʼ οἶκον ἐκκλησία the congregation in the house Ro 16:5; 1 Cor 16:19. κατʼ ἰδίαν s. ἴδιος 5. κ. μόνας (Thu. 1, 32, 5; Menand., Epitr. 988 S. [658 Kö.], Fgm. 146 Kö. [158 Kock]; Polyb. 4, 15, 11; Diod S 4, 51, 16; BGU 813, 15 [s. APF 2, 1903, 97]; LXX) alone, by oneself Mk 4:10; Lk 9:18; Hm 11:8 (here, as well as BGU loc. cit. and LXX, written as one word καταμόνας).

ⓓ of places viewed serially, distributive use w. acc., x by x (Arrian., Anab. 4, 21, 10 κ. σκηνήν=tent by tent) or from x to x: κατʼ οἶκον from house to house (PLond III, 904, 20 p. 125 [104 A.D.] ἡ κατʼ οἰκίαν ἀπογραφή) Ac 2:46b; 5:42 (both in ref. to various house assemblies or congregations; w. less probability NRSV ‘at home’); cp. 20:20. Likew. the pl. κ. τοὺς οἴκους εἰσπορευόμενος 8:3. κ. τὰς συναγωγάς 22:19. κ. πόλιν (Jos., Ant. 6, 73) from city to city IRo 9:3, but in every (single) city Ac 15:21; 20:23; Tit 1:5. Also κ. πόλιν πᾶσαν (cp. Herodian 1, 14, 9) Ac 15:36; κ. πᾶσαν πόλιν 20:23 D. κ. πόλιν καὶ κώμην Lk 8:1; cp. vs. 4.

② marker of temporal aspect (Hdt. et al.; ins, pap, LXX, apolog.)

ⓐ in definite indications of time: at, on, during (Hdt. 8, 17; Polemon Soph. B 43 Reader κατʼ ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν ‘in the course of that day’) κατʼ ἀρχάς in the beginning (cp. ἀρχή 1b) Hb 1:10 (Ps 101:26). κ. τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ πειρασμοῦ in the day of trial 3:8 (Ps 94:8.—Cp. Antig. Car. 173 κ. τὸν σπόρου καιρόν). νεκροῦ … ἀνάστασιν κατʼ αὐτὸν γεγονυῖαν ἱστορεῖ (Papias) reports that a resurrection from the dead occurred in his time Papias (2, 9; so, with personal names, Hdt.; Just., D. 23, 1 τοῦ θεοῦ … τοῦ κ. τὸν Ἐνώχ; Tat. 31, 2 Θεαγένης … κ. Καμβύσην γεγονώς). Of the future: κ. τὸν καιρὸν τοῦτον at that time, then Ro 9:9 (Gen 18:10). Of the past: κ. ἐκεῖνον τὸν καιρόν at that time, then (2 Macc 3:5; TestJos 12:1; Jos., Ant. 8, 266; cp. κατʼ ἐκεῖνο τοῦ καιροῦ Konon: 26 Fgm. 3 p. 191, 25 Jac.; Just., A I, 17, 2; 26, 3 al.) Ac 12:1; 19:23. κ. καιρόν at that time, then Ro 5:6 (Just., D. 132, 1; cp. OGI 90, 28 καθʼ ὸ̔ν καιρόν), unless καιρός here means the right time (s. καιρός 1b end). κατʼ ὄναρ (as καθʼ ὕπνον Gen 20:6; Just., D 60, 5 κ. τοὺς ὕπνους) during a dream, in a dream Mt 1:20; 2:12 (s. s.v. ὄναρ for ins).

ⓑ with indefinite indications of time: toward, about κ. τὸ μεσονύκτιον about midnight Ac 16:25; cp. 27:27.—8:26 (s. μεσημβρία 1).

ⓒ distributively (cp. 1d): x period by x period: κατʼ ἔτος every year (s. ἔτος) Lk 2:41. Also κατʼ ἐνιαυτόν (s. ἐνιαυτός 1) Hb 9:25; 10:1, 3. καθʼ ἡμέραν daily, every day (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Mt 26:55; Mk 14:49; Lk 16:19; 22:53; Ac 2:46f; 3:2; 16:5; 17:11; 19:9; 1 Cor 15:31; Hb 7:27; 10:11. Also τὸ καθʼ ἡμέραν (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Lk 11:3; 19:47; Ac 17:11 v.l. ἡ ἐπίστασις ἡ καθʼ ἡμέραν (s. ἐπίστασις) 2 Cor 11:28. κ. πᾶσαν ἡμέραν every day (Jos., Ant. 6, 49) Ac 17:7. Also καθʼ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Hb 3:13. κ. μίαν σαββάτου on the first day of every week 1 Cor 16:2. κ. πᾶν σάββατον every Sabbath Ac 13:27; 15:21b; 18:4. κ. μῆνα ἕκαστον each month Rv 22:2 (κ. μῆνα as SIG 153, 65; POxy 275, 18; 2 Macc 6:7). κ. ἑορτήν at each festival Mt 27:15; Mk 15:6.

③ marker of division of a greater whole into individual parts, at a time, in detail, distributive use apart from indications of place (s. above 1d) and time (s. 2c)

ⓐ w. numerals: κ. δύο ἢ τὸ πλεῖστον τρεῖς two or, at the most, three at a time (i.e. in any one meeting, cp. ἀνὰ μέρος) 1 Cor 14:27 (Dio Chrys. 80 [30], 42 κ. δύο καὶ τρεῖς; Jos., Ant. 3, 142 κ. ἕξ; 5, 172 κ. δύο καὶ τρεῖς). καθʼ ἕνα (on this and the foll. s. εἷς 5e) singly, one after the other vs. 31. κ. ἕνα λίθον each individual stone Hs 9, 3, 5; καθʼ ἕνα λίθον 9, 6, 3. κ. ἓν ἕκαστον one by one, in detail Ac 21:19; 1 Cl 32:1 (Ath. 28, 4 καθʼ ἕκαστον). εἷς καθʼ εἷς Mk 14:19; J 8:9; cp. Ro 12:5 (B-D-F §305; Rob. 460). κ. ἑκατὸν καὶ κ. πεντήκοντα in hundreds and in fifties Mk 6:40.

ⓑ περί τινος λέγειν κ. μέρος speak of someth. in detail Hb 9:5 (s. μέρος 1c). κατʼ ὄνομα (each one) by name (ἀσπάζομαι … τοὺς ἐνοίκους πάντες κα[τʼ] ὄνομα PTebt [III A.D.] 422, 11–16; Jos., Vi. 86) J 10:3; 3J 15 (cp. BGU 27, 18); ISm 13:2.

④ marker of intention or goal, for the purpose of, for, to (Thu. 6, 31, 1 κ. θέαν ἥκειν=to look at something; cp. Sb 7263, 6 [254 B.C.]; X., An. 3, 5, 2 καθʼ ἁρπαγὴν ἐσκεδασμένοι; Arrian, Anab. 1, 17, 12; 4, 5, 1; 21, 9; 6, 17, 6; 26, 2; Lucian, Ver. Hist. 2, 29; Anton. Lib., Fab. 24, 1 Δημήτηρ ἐπῄει γῆν ἅπασαν κ. ζήτησιν τῆς θυγατρός; 38; Jdth 11:19) κ. τὸν καθαρισμὸν τῶν Ἰουδαίων for the Jewish ceremonial purification J 2:6. κατὰ ἀτιμίαν λέγω to my shame 2 Cor 11:21 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 268 κ. τιμὴν τ. θεοῦ τοῦτο ποιῶν). ἀπόστολος … κ. πίστιν … καὶ ἐπίγνωσιν an apostle … for the faith … and the knowledge Tit 1:1 (but the mng. ‘in accordance with’ is also prob.).

⑤ marker of norm of similarity or homogeneity, according to, in accordance with, in conformity with, according to

ⓐ to introduce the norm which governs someth.

α. the norm of the law, etc. (OGI 56, 33; Mitt-Wilck., I/2, 352, 11 κ. τὰ κελευσθέντα [as Just., D. 78, 7]; POxy 37 II, 8) κ. τὸν νόμον (Jos., Ant. 14, 173; 15, 51; Just., D. 10, 1 al.; Ath. 31, 1; κ. τοὺς νόμους Ἀρεοπαγείτης, letter of MAurelius: ZPE 8, ’71, 169, ln. 27) Lk 2:22; J 18:31; 19:7; Hb 7:5. τὰ κ. τ. νόμον what is to be done according to the law Lk 2:39 (cp. EpArist 32). κ. τὸ ὡρισμένον in accordance w. what has been determined 22:22. Cp. 1:9; 2:24, 27, 42; Ac 17:2; 22:3. κ. τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου Ro 2:16; 16:25a; 2 Ti 2:8. κ. τὸ εἰρημένον Ro 4:18 (cp. Ath. 28, 1 κ. τὰ προειρημένα). κ. τὰς γραφάς (Just., D. 82, 4; cp. Paus. 6, 21, 10 κ. τὰ ἔπη=according to the epic poems; Just., A I, 32, 14 κ. τὸ λόγιον, D. 67, 1 κ. τὴν προφητείαν ταύτην) 1 Cor 15:3; cp. Js 2:8. κ. τὴν παράδοσιν Mk 7:5 (Tat. 39, 1 κ. τὴν Ἑλλήνων παράδοσιν).—κ. λόγον as one wishes (exx. in Dssm., B 209 [not in BS]; also PEleph 13, 1; 3 Macc 3:14) Ac 18:14 (though 5bβ below is also prob.).—It can also stand simply w. the acc. of the pers. according to whose will, pleasure, or manner someth. occurs κ. θεόν (cp. Socrat., Ep. 14, 5 κ. θεόν; 26, 2; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 4 p. 332, 1 Jac. and Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 84 §352 κ. δαίμονα; Jos., Ant. 4, 143 ὁ κ. τοῦτον[=θεόν] βίος; Just., D. 5, 1 κ. τινας … Πλατωνικούς; Tat. 1, 3 κ. … τὸν κωμικόν) Ro 8:27; 2 Cor 7:9–11; κ. Χριστὸν Ἰ. Ro 15:5. κ. κύριον 2 Cor 11:17. Cp. 1 Pt 1:15. κ. τ. Ἕλληνας in the manner of the Greeks, i.e. polytheists PtK 2, p. 14, 1; 7. κ. Ἰουδαίους ln. 25.

β. the norm according to which a judgment is rendered, or rewards or punishments are given ἀποδοῦναι τινι κ. τ. πρᾶξιν or ἔργα αὐτοῦ (Ps 61:13; Pr 24:12; Just., A I, 12, 1; 17, 4 al.; κατʼ ἀξίαν τῶν πράξεων) Mt 16:27; Ro 2:6; 2 Ti 4:14; Rv 2:23. μισθὸν λήμψεται κ. τ. ἴδιον κόπον 1 Cor 3:8. κρίνειν κ. τι J 7:24; 8:15; 1 Pt 1:17; cp. Ro 2:2.

γ. of a standard of any other kind κ. τ. χρόνον ὸ̔ν ἠκρίβωσεν in accordance w. the time which he had ascertained Mt 2:16. κ. τ. πίστιν ὑμῶν acc. to your faith 9:29. κ. τ. δύναμιν acc. to his capability 25:15 (Just., D. 139, 4; Tat. 12, 3; cp. Just., A II, 13, 6 κ. δύναμιν). Cp. Lk 1:38; 2:29; Ro 8:4; 10:2; Eph 4:7. ἀνὴρ κ. τ. καρδίαν μου Ac 13:22 (καρδία 1bε).

δ. Oft. the norm is at the same time the reason, so that in accordance with and because of are merged: οἱ κ. πρόθεσιν κλητοί Ro 8:28. κατʼ ἐπιταγὴν θεοῦ 16:26; 1 Ti 1:1; Tit 1:3. κ. ἀποκάλυψιν Eph 3:3 (Just., D. 78, 2). οἱ καθʼ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ Ro 2:7. κατʼ ἐκλογήν 11:5 (Just., D. 49, 1). Cp. κ. τὴν βουλήν Eph 1:11 (Just., A I, 63, 16 al.); 2 Th 2:9; Hb 7:16. κ. τί γνώσομαι τοῦτο; by what shall I know this? (cp. Gen 15:8) Lk 1:18.—Instead of ‘in accordance w.’ κ. can mean simply because of, as a result of, on the basis of (Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 219 D.: κ. τοὺς νόμους; Jos., Ant. 1, 259; 278; Just., A I, 54, 1 κατʼ ἐνέργειαν τῶν φαύλων δαιμόνων; Ath. 7, 1 κ. συμπάθειαν τῆς παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ πνοῆς; 32, 1 κ. χρησμόν). κ. πᾶσαν αἰτίαν for any and every reason (αἰτία 1) Mt 19:3. κ. ἀποκάλυψιν Gal 2:2. Cp. Ro 2:5; 1 Cor 12:8 (κ. τ. πνεῦμα = διὰ τοῦ πν.); Eph 1:5; 4:22b; Phil 4:11; 1 Ti 5:21; 2 Ti 1:9; Tit 3:5; κ. ἀνάγκην Phlm 14 (Ar. 1, 2; 4, 2 al.; Just., A I, 30, 1; 61, 10; Ath. 24, 2); IPol 1:3. ὁ κ. τὸ πολὺ αὐτοῦ ἔλεος ἀναγεννήσας ἡμᾶς 1 Pt 1:3.—καθʼ ὅσον (Thu. 4, 18, 4) in so far as, inasmuch as Hb 3:3. καθʼ ὅσον …, κ. τοσοῦτο in so far as …, just so far (Lysias 31, 8; Galen, De Dignosc. Puls. 3, 2, VIII 892 K.) 7:20, 22.

ⓑ as a periphrasis to express equality, similarity, or example in accordance with, just as, similar(ly) to (TestJob 32:6 τίς γὰρ κ. σε ἐν μέσῳ τῶν τέκνων σου; Tat. 25, 1 κ. … τὸν Πρωτέα like Proteus; schol. on Nicander, Ther. 50: sheep are not burden-bearers κ. τοὺς ὄνους=as donkeys are).

α. κ. τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν μὴ ποιεῖτε do not do as they do Mt 23:3. κ. Ἰσαάκ just as Isaac Gal 4:28. κ. θεὸν κτισθείς Eph 4:24 (Synes., Prov. 2, 2 p. 118c κ. θεόν=just as a god). Cp. Col 3:10. κ. τὸν τύπον Hb 8:5 (Ex 25:40; Mel., P. 58, 424 [νόμον v.l.]). Cp. 5:6 (Ps 109:4); 8:9 (Jer 38: 32); Js 3:9.—κ. τὰ αὐτά in (just) the same way (OGI 56, 66; PEleph 2, 6; 1 Macc 8:27; 12:2; Just., D. 1, 2; 3, 5; 113, 3) Lk 6:23, 26; 17:30; Dg 3:1. On the other hand, the sing. κ. τὸ αὐτό Ac 14:1 means together (marriage contract PEleph 1, 5 [IV B.C.] εἶναι ἡμᾶς κ. ταὐτό; 1 Km 11:11). καθʼ ὸ̔ν τρόπον just as (2 Macc 6:20; 4 Macc 14:17) Ac 15:11; 27:25. καθʼ ὅσον …, οὕτως (just) as …, so Hb 9:27. κ. πάντα τρόπον in every way (PSI 520, 16 [250 B.C.]; PCairZen 631, 2; 3 Macc 3:24) Ro 3:2. κ. μηδένα τρόπον (PMagd 14, 9 [221 B.C.]; PRein 7, 31; 3 Macc 4:13; 4 Macc 4:24; Just., D. 35, 7; s. Reader, Polemo 262) 2 Th 2:3. Cp. Johannessohn, Kasus, 1910, 82. κατά w. acc. serves in general

β. to indicate the nature, kind, peculiarity or characteristics of a thing (freq. as a periphrasis for the adv.; e.g. Antiochus of Syracuse [V B.C.]: 555 Fgm. 12 Jac. κ. μῖσος=out of hate, filled with hate) κατʼ ἐξουσίαν with authority or power Mk 1:27. κ. συγκυρίαν by chance Lk 10:31. κ. ἄγνοιαν without knowing Ac 3:17 (s. ἄγνοια 2a). κ. ἄνθρωπον 1 Cor 3:3 al. (s. Straub 15; Aeschyl., Th. 425; ἄνθρωπος 2b). κ. κράτος powerfully, Ac 19:20 (κράτος 1a). κ. λόγον reasonably, rightly (Pla.; Polyb. 1, 62, 4; 5; 5, 110, 10; Jos., Ant. 13, 195; PYale 42, 24 [12 Jan., 229 B.C.]) 18:14 (but s. above 5aα). λέγειν τι κ. συγγνώμην οὐ κατʼ ἐπιταγήν say someth. as a concession, not as a command 1 Cor 7:6; cp. 2 Cor 8:8. κ. τάξιν in (an) order(ly manner) 1 Cor 14:40 (τάξις 2). κατʼ ὀφθαλμοδουλίαν with eye-service Eph 6:6. μηδὲν κατʼ ἐριθείαν μηδὲ κ. κενοδοξίαν Phil 2:3. κ. ζῆλος zealously 3:6a, unless this pass. belongs under 6 below, in its entirety. κ. σάρκα on the physical plane Ro 8:12f; 2 Cor 1:17; also 5:16ab, if here κ. ς. belongs w. οἴδαμεν or ἐγνώκαμεν (as Bachmann, JWeiss, H-D Wendland, Sickenberger take it; s. 7a below). καθʼ ὑπερβολήν (PTebt 42, 5f [c. 114 B.C.] ἠδικημένος καθʼ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπὸ, Ἁρμιύσιος; 4 Macc 3:18) beyond measure, beyond comparison Ro 7:13; 1 Cor 12:31; 2 Cor 4:17. καθʼ ὁμοιότητα (Aristot.; Gen 1:12; Philo, Fug. 51; Tat. 12, 4 κ. τὸ ὅμοιον αὐτῇ) in a similar manner Hb 4:15b. κ. μικρόν in brief B 1:5 (μικρός 1eγ).

⑥ denoting relationship to someth., with respect to, in relation to κ. σάρκα w. respect to the flesh, physically of human descent Ro 1:3; 4:1; 9:3, 5 (Ar. 15, 7 κ. σάρκα … κ. ψυχήν; Just., D. 43, 7 ἐν τῷ γένει τῷ κ. σάρκα τοῦ Ἀβραάμ al.). κ. τὸν ἔσω ἄνθρωπον 7:22 (cp. POxy 904, 6 πληγαῖς κατακοπτόμενον κ. τὸ σῶμα). Cp. Ro 1:4; 11:28; Phil 3:5, 6b (for vs. 6a s. 5bβ above); Hb 9:9b. τὰ κ. τινα (Hdt. 7, 148; Diod S 1, 10, 73; Aelian, VH 2, 20; PEleph 13, 3; POxy 120, 14; Tob 10:9; 1 Esdr 9:17; 2 Macc 3:40; 9:3 al.) someone’s case, circumstances Ac 24:22 (cp. PEleph 13, 3 τὰ κ. σε; Just., A I, 61, 13 τὰ κ. τὸν Ἰησοῦν πάντα, D. 102, 2 τὰ κ. αὐτόν; Ath. 24, 4 τὸ κ. τοὺς ἀγγέλους); 25:14; Eph 6:21; Phil 1:12; Col 4:7. κ. πάντα in all respects (since Thu. 4, 81, 3; Sb 4324, 3; 5761, 22; SIG 834, 7; Gen 24:1; Wsd 19:22; 2 Macc 1:17; 3 Macc 5:42; JosAs 1:7; Just., A II, 4, 4, D. 35, 8 al.); Ac 17:22; Col 3:20, 22a; Hb 2:17 (Artem. 1, 13 αὐτῷ ὅμοιον κ. π.); 4:15a.

⑦ Somet. the κατά phrase, which would sound cumbersome in the rendering ‘such-and-such’, ‘in line with’, or ‘in accordance with’, is best rendered as an adj., a possessive pron., or with a genitival construction to express the perspective from which something is perceived or to be understood. In translation it thus functions as

ⓐ an adj. (Synes., Kingdom 4 p. 4d τὰ κατʼ ἀρετὴν ἔργα i.e. the deeds that are commensurate with that which is exceptional = virtuous deeds; PHib 27, 42 ταῖς κ. σελήνην ἡμέραις; 4 Macc 5:18 κ. ἀλήθειαν=ἀληθής; Just., A I, 2, 1 τοὺς κ. ἀλήθειαν εὐσεβεῖς; Tat. 26, 2 τῆς κ. ἀλήθειαν σοφίας) οἱ κ. φύσιν κλάδοι the natural branches Ro 11:21. ἡ κατʼ εὐσέβειαν διδασκαλία 1 Ti 6:3; cp. Tit 1:1b. οἱ κ. σάρκα κύριοι the earthly masters (in wordplay, anticipating the κύριος who is in the heavens, vs. 9) Eph 6:5. Cp. 2 Cor 5:16b, in case (s. 5bβ above) κ. ς. belongs w. Χριστόν (as the majority, incl. Ltzm., take it): a physical Christ, a Christ in the flesh, in his earthly relationships (σάρξ 5). Correspondingly in vs. 16a κ. ς. would be taken w. οὐδένα: no one simply as a physical being.—JMartyn, JKnox Festschr., ’67, 269–87.

ⓑ a possessive pron., but with limiting force (Demosth. 2, 27 τὰ καθʼ ὑμᾶς ἐλλείμματα [i.e. in contrast to the activities of others: ‘your own’]; Aelian, VH 2, 42 ἡ κατʼ αὐτὸν ἀρετή; 3, 36; OGI 168, 17 παραγεγονότες εἰς τοὺς καθʼ ὑμᾶς τόπους; SIG 646, 6; 807, 15 al.; UPZ 20, 9 [II B.C.] ἐπὶ τῆς καθʼ ἡμᾶς λειτουργίας; PTebt 24, 64; 2 Macc 4:21; Tat. 42, 1 τίς ὁ θεὸς καὶ τίς ἡ κατʼ αὐτὸν ποίησις; Mel., HE 4, 26, 7 ἡ καθʼ ἡμᾶς φιλοσοφία) τῶν καθʼ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν τινες some of your (own) poets Ac 17:28. ἡ καθʼ ὑμᾶς πίστις Eph 1:15. ὁ καθʼ ὑμᾶς νόμος Ac 18:15. τὸ κατʼ ἐμὲ πρόθυμον my eagerness Ro 1:15.

ⓒ a gen. w. a noun (Polyb. 3, 113, 1 ἡ κ. τὸν ἥλιον ἀνατολή; 2, 48, 2; 3, 8, 1 al.; Diod S 14, 12 ἡ κ. τὸν τύραννον ὠμότης; Dionys. Hal. 2, 1; SIG 873, 5 τῆς κ. τ. μυστήρια τελετῆς; 569, 22; 783, 20; PTebt 5, 25; PLond III, 1164k, 20 p. 167 [212 A.D.] ὑπὸ τοῦ κ. πατέρα μου ἀνεψιοῦ) τὰ κ. Ἰουδαίους ἔθη the customs of the Judeans Ac 26:3 (Tat. 12, 5 τῇ κ. Βαβυλωνίους προγνωστικῇ; 34, 2 ἡ κ. τὸν Ἀριστόδημον πλαστική). Cp. 27:2. ἡ κ. πίστιν δικαιοσύνη the righteousness of faith Hb 11:7. ἡ κατʼ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις purpose of election Ro 9:11.—Here also belong the titles of the gospels εὐαγγέλιον κατὰ Ματθαῖον etc., where κατά is likew. periphrasis for a gen. (cp. JLydus, De Mag. 3, 46 p. 136, 10 Wünsch τῆς κ. Λουκανὸν συγγραφῆς; Herodian 2, 9, 4 of an autobiography ἐν τῷ καθʼ αὑτὸν βίῳ; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 18 τ. καθʼ αὐτὸν ἱστορίαν; 2 Macc 2:13. Cp. B-D-F §163; 224, 2; Zahn, Einleitung §49; BBacon, Why ‘According to Mt’? Exp., 8th ser., 16, 1920, 289–310).—On the periphrasis of the gen. by κατά s. Rudberg (ἀνά beg.) w. many exx. fr. Pla. on. But it occurs as early as Thu. 6, 16, 5 ἐν τῷ κατʼ αὐτοὺς βίῳ.—M-M. DELG. EDNT. TW.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κατά
11 φέρω

φέρω (Hom.+) impf. ἔφερον; fut. οἴσω J 21:18; Rv 21:26; 1 aor. ἤνεγκα, ptc. ἐνέγκας; 2 aor. inf. ἐνεγκεῖν (B-D-F §81, 2); pf. ἐνήνοχα (LXX, JosAs). Pass.: 1 aor. ἠνέχθην 2 Pt 1:17, 21a, 3 pl. ἐνέχθησαν Hs 8, 2, 1.

① to bear or carry from one place to another, w. focus on an act of transport

ⓐ lit.

α. carry, bear (Aristoph., Ra. [Frogs] 27 τὸ βάρος ὸ̔ φέρεις; X., Mem. 3, 13, 6 φορτίον φέρειν; GrBar 12:1 κανίσκια ‘baskets’) ἐπέθηκαν αὐτῷ τὸν σταυρὸν φέρειν ὄπισθεν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ Lk 23:26 (s. σταυρός 1).—In imagery drawn from Gen 2 οὗ ξύλον φέρων καὶ καρπὸν αἱρῶν if you bear the tree (of the word) and pluck its fruit Dg 12:8. For Papias (3:2) s. 3a.

β. bring with one, bring/take along (Diod S 6, 7, 8 γράμματα φέρων; GrBar 12:7 φέρετε ὸ̔ ἠνέγκατε ‘bring here what you have brought’, for the nuance of φέρετε s. 2a; PTebt 418, 9; 421, 6; 8) φέρουσαι ἃ ἡτοίμασαν ἀρώματα Lk 24:1. Cp. J 19:39.

ⓑ fig.

α. carry a burden οὗτος τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν φέρει 1 Cl 16:4 (Is 53:4).

β. bear a name τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ κυρίου bear the name of the Lord, i.e. of a Christian Pol 6:3 (cp. Just., D. 35, 6).

γ. bear/grant a favor χάριν τινὶ φέρειν (Il. 5, 211; Od. 5, 307; cp. Aeschyl., Ag. 421f; but not Andoc., De Reditu 9 ‘express gratitude’) ἐλπίσατε ἐπὶ τὴν φερομένην ὑμῖν χάριν ἐν ἀποκαλύψει Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ hope for the favor that is being granted you in connection w. the revelation of Jesus Christ (i.e. when he is revealed) 1 Pt 1:13.

② to cause an entity to move from one position to another, w. focus on the presentation or effecting of someth.

ⓐ a thing bring (on), produce (GrBar 12:7 φέρετε ‘bring here’ [what you have brought with you, s. 1aβ])

α. bring (to), fetch τὶ someth. Mk 6:27, 28 (ἐπὶ πίνακι. On the bringing in of a head at a banquet cp. Diog. L. 9, 58: the presence of a severed head did not necessarily disturb the mood at a meal. Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 20, §81 relates concerning Antony that he had the head of Cicero placed πρὸ τῆς τραπέζης); Lk 13:7 D; 15:22 v.l. for ἐξ-; Ac 4:34, 37; 5:2; 2 Ti 4:13; B 2:5; MPol 11:2; Hs 8, 1, 16 (w. double acc., of obj. and pred.); 9, 10, 1; δῶρα GJs 1:2; 5:1. Pass. Mt 14:11a (ἐπὶ πίνακι); Hv 3, 2, 7; 3, 5, 3; Hs 8, 2, 1ab; 9, 4, 7; 9, 6, 5–7; 9, 9, 4f. τινί τι (JosAs 16:1 φέρε δή μοι καὶ κηρίον μέλιτος; ApcMos 6) someth. to someone Mt 14:18 (w. ὧδε); Mk 12:15. θυσίαν τῷ θεῷ 1 Cl 4:1 (s. Gen 4:3; cp. Just., A I, 24, 2 θυσίας). The acc. is supplied fr. the context Mt 14:11b; J 2:8a. The dat. and acc. are to be supplied οἱ δὲ ἤνεγκαν Mk 12:16; J 2:8b. φέρειν πρός τινα w. acc. of the thing to be supplied (X., Cyr. 8, 3, 47; Ex 32:2) Hs 8, 4, 3; 9, 10, 2. φ. τι εἰς (1 Km 31:12) Rv 21:24, 26. μή τις ἤνεγκεν αὐτῷ φαγεῖν; do you suppose that anyone has brought him anything to eat? J 4:33. S. φόρος.

β. Fig. bring (about) (Hom.+; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 284, 11 [II B.C.] αἰσχύνην; PTebt 104, 30; POxy 497, 4; 1062, 14; Jos., Vi. 93, C. Ap. 1, 319; SibOr 3, 417; Just., A I, 27, 5 [βλάβην]) τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ φέρον ἄφεσιν the baptism which brings (about) forgiveness B 11:1.

ⓑ a living being, animal or human, lead, bring

α. animals (TestAbr A 2 p. 79, 8 [Stone p. 6] ἵππους; ibid. B 2 p. 106, 21 [Stone p. 60] μόσχον) Mk 11:2, 7 (πρός τινα); Lk 15:23; Ac 14:13 (ἐπὶ τ. πυλῶνας); GJs 4:3.

β. people: bring or lead τινά someone ἀσθενεῖς Ac 5:16. κακούργους GPt 4:10. τινὰ ἐπὶ κλίνης (Jos., Ant. 17, 197) Lk 5:18. τινά τινι someone to someone Mt 17:17 (w. ὧδε); Mk 7:32; 8:22. Also τινὰ πρός τινα Mk 1:32; 2:3; 9:17, 19f. φέρουσιν αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸν Γολγοθᾶν τόπον 15:22 (TestAbr A 11 p. 88, 27 [Stone p. 24] ἐπὶ τὴν ἀνατολήν). ἄλλος οἴσει (σε) ὅπου οὐ θέλεις J 21:18.

③ to cause to follow a certain course in direction or conduct, move out of position, drive, the pass. can be variously rendered: be moved, be driven, let oneself be moved

ⓐ lit., by wind and weather (Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1700; Chariton 3, 5, 1; Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 62 §278 in spite of the storm Marius leaped into a boat and ἐπέτρεψε τῇ τύχῃ φέρειν let himself be driven away by fortune; Jer 18:14; PsSol 8:2 πυρὸς … φερομένου; TestNapht 6:5; Ar. 4, 2 ἄστρα … φερόμενα; Tat. 26, 1 τῆς νεὼς φερομένης) Ac 27:15, 17.—Move, pass (s. L-S-J-M s.v. φέρω B 1) φέρεσθαι δὲ διʼ αὐτοῦ … ἰχῶρας foul discharges were emitted … through it (Judas’s penis) Papias (3:2).

ⓑ fig., of the Spirit of God, by whom people are moved (cp. Job 17:1 πνεύματι φερόμενος) ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου φερόμενοι 2 Pt 1:21b. Cp. Ac 15:29 D. τῇ πίστει φερόμενος ὁ Παῦλος AcPl Ha 5, 1. Of the impulse to do good Hs 6, 5, 7. Of the powers of evil (Ps.-Plut., Hom. 133 ὑπὸ ὀργῆς φερόμενοι; Jos., Bell. 6, 284; Ath. 25, 4) PtK 2 p. 14, 11; Dg 9:1; Hs 8, 9, 3.

ⓒ also of the wind itself (Ptolem., Apotel. 1, 11, 3 οἱ φερόμενοι ἄνεμοι; Diog. L. 10, 104 τ. πνεύματος πολλοῦ φερομένου; Quint. Smyrn. 3, 718) φέρεσθαι rush Ac 2:2.

ⓓ of various other entities: of fragrance φέρεσθαι ἐπί τινα be borne or wafted to someone (Dio Chrys. 66 [16], 6 ‘rush upon someone’) ApcPt 5:16.—Of writings (Diog. L. 5, 86 φέρεται αὐτοῦ [i.e. Heraclid. Pont.] συγγράμματα κάλλιστα; Marinus, Vi. Procli 38; cp. Arrian, Anab. 7, 12, 6 λόγος ἐφέρετο Ἀλεξάνδρου=a saying of Alexander was circulated) οὗ (=τοῦ Εἰρηναίου) πολλὰ συγγράμματα φέρεται of whom there are many writings in circulation EpilMosq 2.—Of spiritual development ἐπὶ τὴν τελειότητα φερώμεθα let us move on toward perfection Hb 6:1.

④ to move an object to a particular point, put, place φέρειν τὸν δάκτυλον, τὴν χεῖρα put or reach out the finger, the hand J 20:27a (ὧδε), vs. 27b.

⑤ to cause to continue in a state or condition, sustain, fig., of the Son of God φέρων τὰ πάντα τῷ ῥήματι τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ who bears up the universe by his mighty word Hb 1:3 (cp. Plut., Lucull. 6, 3 φέρειν τὴν πόλιν; Num 11:14; Dt 1:9).

⑥ to afford passage to a place, lead to, of a gate, lead somewhere (cp. Hdt. 2, 122; Thu. 3, 24, 1 τὴν ἐς Θήβας φέρουσαν ὁδόν; Ps.-Demosth. 47, 53 θύρα εἰς τὸν κῆπον φέρουσα; SIG 1118, 5; POxy 99, 7; 17 [I A.D.]; 69, 1 [II A.D.] θύρα φέρουσα εἰς ῥύμην) τήν πύλην τὴν φέρουσαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν Ac 12:10 (X., Hell. 7, 2, 7 αἱ εἰς τὴν πόλιν φέρουσαι πύλαι; Diog. L. 6, 78 παρὰ τῇ πύλῃ τῇ φερούσῃ εἰς τὸν Ἰσθμόν; Jos., Ant. 9, 146).—See Fitzmyer s.v. ἄγω.

⑦ to bring a thought or idea into circulation, bring, utter, make a word, speech, announcement, charge, etc. (TestAbr B 6 p. 110, 8/Stone p. 68 [ParJer 7:8] φάσιν ‘news’; Jos., Vi. 359, C. Ap. 1, 251; Just., A I, 54, 1 ἀπόδειξιν ‘proof’, A II, 12, 5 ἀπολογίαν), as a judicial expr. (cp. Demosth. 58, 22; Polyb. 1, 32, 4; PAmh 68, 62; 69; 72) κατηγορίαν J 18:29. Cp. Ac 25:7 v.l., 18 (Field, Notes 140); 2 Pt 2:11. Perh. this is the place for μᾶλλον ἑαυτῶν κατάγνωσιν φέρουσιν rather they blame themselves 1 Cl 51:2. διδαχήν 2J 10. ὑποδείγματα give or offer examples 1 Cl 55:1 (Polyb. 18, 13, 7 τὰ παραδείγματα). τοῦτο φέρεται ἐν this is brought out = this is recorded in EpilMosq 4.—Of a divine proclamation, whether direct or indirect (Diod S 13, 97, 7 τ. ἱερῶν φερόντων νίκην; Just., D. 128, 2 τοῦ πατρὸς ὁμιλίας [of the Logos]) 2 Pt 1:17, 18, 21a.

⑧ to demonstrate the reality of someth., establish θάνατον ἀνάγκη φέρεσθαι τοῦ διαθεμένου the death of the one who made the will must be established Hb 9:16.

⑨ to hold out in the face of difficulty, bear patiently, endure, put up with (X., An. 3, 1, 23; Appian, Samn. 10 §13 παρρησίαν φ.=put up with candidness, Iber. 78 §337; Jos., Ant. 7, 372; 17, 342; AssMos Fgm. j βλασφημίαν; Just., D. 18, 3 πάντα; Mel., HE 4, 26, 6 θανάτου τὸ γέρας) μαλακίαν 1 Cl 16:3 (Is 53:3). τὸν ὀνειδισμὸν αὐτοῦ (i.e. Ἰησοῦ) Hb 13:13 (cp. Ezk 34:29). τὸ διαστελλόμενον 12:20. εὐκλεῶς 1 Cl 45:5. Of God ἤνεγκεν ἐν πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ σκεύη ὀργῆς Ro 9:22. φῶς μέγα … ὥστε τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς μὴ φέρειν a light so bright that their eyes could not endure it GJs 19:2.

⑩ to be productive, bear, produce of a plant and its fruits, lit. and in imagery (Hom. et al.; Diod S 9, 11, 1; Aelian, VH 3, 18 p. 48, 20; Jo 2:22; Ezk 17:8; Jos., Ant. 4, 100) Mt 7:18ab; Mk 4:8; J 12:24; 15:2abc, 4f, 8, 16; Hs 2:3f, 8.—B. 707. DELG. Schmidt, Syn. III 167–93. M-M. EDNT. TW.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > φέρω
12 ἔμπροσθεν

ἔμπροσθεν (also ἐνπ-; Hdt.+; also in OT quotes w. and against LXX; Mel., P. 61, 444 [ἀπέναντι Dt 28:66]) ἔμπροσθε (SIG 371, 13 [289/288 B.C.]; 915, 27) ApcPt 3:6; orig. adv. of place, then used as prep. (B-D-F §104, 2; 214, 1; 6; Mlt-H. 329).

① pert. to a position in front of an object

ⓐ gener. adv. as marker of something that is relatively removed in distance in front, ahead (opp. ὄπισθεν, as X., Equ. 1, 3; Polyb. 12, 15, 2; Aelian, VH 12, 21; Palaeph. 29, 2; 2 Ch 13:14; Ezk 2:10) Rv 4:6. As subst.: εἰς τὸ ἔ. toward the front (Diod S 11, 18, 5; 19, 26, 10; 19, 83, 2; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 203) προδραμὼν εἰς τὸ ἔ. he ran ahead Lk 19:4 (where εἰς τὸ ἔ. is pleonast., as Artem. 2, 9 p. 93, 2 προϊέναι εἰς τοὔμπροσθεν; B-D-F §484; Semitism [?]: MBlack, An Aramaic Approach³, ’67, 116); τὰ ἔ. (sc. ὄντα; cp. X., An. 6, 3, 14; 1 Macc 13:27; TestJob 27:1; location in a dialogue Just., D. 126, 6; 140, 4) what lies ahead (as a goal) Phil 3:13.—Forward, ahead πορεύεσθαι ἔ. (X., Cyr. 4, 2, 23) Lk 19:28. αἱ ἔ. ἐκκλησίαι the congregations/churches farther on or principal churches (s. JKleist, tr., ’46, ad loc. w. note) IPol 8:1.

ⓑ indicating more immediate presence of the object that is in front, with ἔ. functioning as prep. w. gen. (s. on ἀνά, beg.) in front of, before in a variety of aspects

α. purely local (X., Cyr. 3, 2, 5; Jos., Bell. 6, 366) Hs 9, 2, 7 (opp. ὀπίσω); ἔ. τοῦ ναοῦ before the shrine (Cebes, Tab. 1, 1) 1 Cl 41:2; ἔ. τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου Mt 5:24; ἔ. τοῦ βήματος Ac 18:17; ἔ. τοῦ Ἰησοῦ Lk 5:19; cp. 14:2; ApcPt 3:6; GPt 4:12. γονυπετεῖν ἔ. τινος kneel before someone Mt 27:29; πίπτειν ἔ. τῶν ποδῶν τινος fall at someone’s feet Rv 19:10; 22:8; βάλλειν ἔ. τινος Mt 7:6 (PGM 4, 1229 βάλε ἔ. αὐτοῦ κλῶνας ἐλαίας). μαστιγοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς ἔ. τούτων τῶν εἰδώλων flagellating themselves before these images ApcPt Bodl. (as restored by EWinstedt, s. MJames, JTS 1910, 12, 157).

β. of position without ref. to motion toward, before, in the presence of (Gen 45:5) ὁμολογεῖν and ἀρνεῖσθαι Mt 10:32f; 26:70; Lk 12:8; cp. Gal 2:14. Esp. of appearance before a judge Mt 27:11; also before the divine judge 25:32; Lk 21:36; 1 Th 2:19; 3:13; GPt 11:48; cp. 2 Cor 5:10. But the judicial element is not decisive in all the pass. in which pers. stand or come ἔ. τοῦ θεοῦ or ἔ. τ. χυρίου; cp. 1 Th 1:3; 3:9; 1J 3:19.

γ. of appearance before a large assemblage to discharge an obligation, before, in the sight of (SIG 1173, 14 [138 A.D.] the man who was healed through the intervention of Asklepios ηὐχαρίστησεν ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ δήμου) Mt 5:16; 6:1; 17:2; 23:13 in the face of; Mk 2:12; 9:2; Lk 19:27; J 12:37; Ac 10:4.

δ. as a reverential way of expressing oneself, when one is speaking of an eminent pers., and esp. of God, not to connect the subject directly w. what happens, but to say that it took place ‘before someone’ (s. Dalman, Worte 171–74): ἐπακοῦσαι ἔ. αὐτοῦ ἔθνη that the nations should give heed (or obey) (before) God B 12:11 (Is 45:1). ποιεῖν τὸ πονηρὸν ἔ. τοῦ κυρίου Hm 4, 2, 2 (cp. Judg 2:11; 3:12; 4:1). εὐδοκία ἔ. σου pleasing to you Mt 11:26; Lk 10:21; θέλημα ἔ. τ. πατρὸς ὑμῶν Mt 18:14.

ε. before, ahead of, w. motion implied ἔ. τινος (UPZ 78, 15 [159 B.C.] ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν ἐπορευόμην) J 10:4; B 11:4 (Is 45:2); προπορεύεσθαι ἔ. τινος 3:4 (Is 58:8); cp. 4:12; ἀποστέλλεσθαι ἔ. τινος (Gen 24:7; 32:4) J 3:28; σαλπίζειν ἔ. τινος blow a trumpet before someone Mt 6:2; τὴν ὁδὸν κατασκευάζειν ἔ. τινος Mt 11:10; Lk 7:27.

ζ. of rank (Pla., Leg. 1, 631d; 5, 743e; 7, 805d; Demosth. 56, 50 εἶναι ἔ. τινος; Gen 48:20) ἔ. τινος γίνεσθαι rank before (i.e. higher than) someone J 1:15, 30 (Plut., Pericl. 158 [11, 1] οἱ ἀριστοκρατικοὶ … Περικλέα … πρόσθεν ὁρῶντες γεγονόντα τῶν πολιτῶν). If ἔ. τινος γ. is to be understood temporally here (as 3 Km 3:12; 16:25, 33; 4 Km 18:5; Eccl 1:16; 2:7, 9; Jos, Ant. 1, 109; cp. Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 12 Jac. ἔτει ἑνὶ ἔμπροσθεν)=‘be earlier than someone’, the foll. ὅτι πρῶτός μου ἦν, which gives the reason for it, would simply be an instance of tautology (but s. OCullmann, ConNeot 11, ’47, 31, who holds that the ὅτι-clause refers to the absolute time of the Prologue while the preceding words merely give the order in which the ministries of John and Jesus began). S. on ὀπίσω 2b.

② on the front surface of someth., in front (opp. ὄπισθεν, as cp. Ezk 2:10) Rv 4:6.—DELG s.v. πρόσθε(ν). M-M.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἔμπροσθεν
13 ἔχω

ἔχω (Hom.+) impf. εἶχον, 1 pl. εἴχαμεν and 3 pl. εἶχαν (both as vv.ll.; Mlt-H. 194; B-D-F §82) Mk 8:7; Rv 9:8 or εἴχοσαν (B-D-F §84, 2; Mlt-H. 194; Kühner-Bl. II p. 55) J 15:22, 24; 2 aor. ἔσχον; mixed aor. forms include ἔσχαν Hv 3, 5, 1, ἔσχοσαν 1 Esdr 6:5; 1 Macc 10:15 (ἔσχον, εἴχον vv.ll.); pf. ἔσχηκα; plpf. ἐσχήκειν.—In the following divisions: act. trans. 1–9; act. intr. 10; mid. 11.

① to possess or contain, have, own (Hom.+)

ⓐ to possess someth. that is under one’s control

α. own, possess (s. esp. TestJob 9f) κτήματα πολλά own much property Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22. πρόβατα Lk 15:4; J 10:16. θησαυρόν Mt 19:21; Mk 10:21b. βίον living Lk 21:4; 1J 3:17. δραχμὰς δέκα Lk 15:8. πλοῖα Rv 18:19. κληρονομίαν Eph 5:5. θυσιαστήριον Hb 13:10a; μέρος ἔ. ἔν τινι have a share in someth. Rv 20:6. Gener. μηδὲν ἔ. own nothing (SibOr 3, 244) 2 Cor 6:10. ὅσα ἔχεις Mk 10:21; cp. 12:44; Mt 13:44, 46; 18:25. τί ἔχεις ὸ̔ οὐκ ἔλαβες; what do you have that you have not been given? 1 Cor 4:7. The obj. acc. is often used w. an adj. or ptc.: ἔ. ἅπαντα κοινά have everything in common Ac 2:44 (cp. Jos., Ant. 15, 18). ἔ. πολλὰ ἀγαθὰ κείμενα have many good things stored up Lk 12:19.—Hb 12:1. Abs. ἔ. have (anything) (Soph.et al.; Sir 13:5; 14:11) Mt 13:12a; Mk 4:25a; Lk 8:18a. ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν in accordance w. what you have 2 Cor 8:11. ἔ. εἰς ἀπαρτισμόν have (enough) to complete Lk 14:28. W. neg. ἔ. have nothing Mt 13:12b; Mk 4:25b; Lk 8:18b.—ὁ ἔχων the one who has, who is well off (Soph., Aj. 157; Eur., Alc. 57; X., An. 7, 3, 28; Ar. 15:7). πᾶς ὁ ἔχων everyone who has (anything) Mt 25:29a; Lk 19:26a. ὁ μὴ ἔχων the one who has nothing (X., An. 7, 3, 28; 1 Esdr 9:51, 54; 2 Esdr 18:10) Mt 25:29b; Lk 19:26b; 1 Cor 11:22.

β. have = hold in one’s charge or keeping ἔ. τὰς κλεῖς hold the keys Rv 1:18; cp. 3:7. τὸ γλωσσόκομον the money-box J 12:6; 13:29.

ⓑ to contain someth. have, possess, of the whole in relation to its parts

α. of living beings, of parts of the body in men and animals μέλη Ro 12:4a; cp. 1 Cor 12:12. σάρκα καὶ ὀστέα Lk 24:39 (Just., A I, 66, 2 καὶ σάρκα καὶ αἷμα) ἀκροβυστίαν Ac 11:3. οὖς Rv 2:7, 11. ὦτα Mt 11:15; Mk 7:16; Lk 8:8. χεῖρας, πόδας, ὀφθαλμούς Mt 18:8f; Mk 9:43, 45, 47. Of animals and animal-like beings ἔ. πρόσωπον Rv 4:7. πτέρυγας vs. 8. κέρατα 5:6. ψυχάς 8:9. τρίχας 9:8. κεφαλάς 12:3 (TestAbr B 14 p. 118, 19 [Stone p. 84]) al. ἔχοντες ὑγιῆ τὴν σάρκα AcPlCor 2:32 (Just., D. 48, 3 σάρκα ἔχων). Of plants (TestAbr B 3 p. 107, 6 [Stone p. 62] εὗρον δένδρον … ἔχον κλάδους) ῥίζαν ἔ. Mt 13:6; Mk 4:6.

β. of inanimate things: of cities τ. θεμελίους ἔ. Hb 11:10; cp. Rv 21:14. Of a head-covering χαρακτῆρα ἔχει βασιλικόν has a royal emblem GJs 2:2.

ⓒ to have at hand, have at one’s disposal have ἄρτους Mt 14:17; cp. 15:34; J 21:5, where the sense is prob. ‘Did you catch any fish for breakfast?’. οὐκ ἔχω ὸ̔ παραθήσω αὐτῷ I have nothing to set before him Lk 11:6. μὴ ἐχόντων τί φάγωσι since they had nothing to eat Mk 8:1; cp. Mt 15:32 (Soph., Oed. Col. 316 οὐκ ἔχω τί φῶ). οὐκ ἔχω ποῦ συνάξω I have no place to store Lk 12:17. ἄντλημα a bucket J 4:11a. οἰκίας ἔ. have houses (at one’s disposal) 1 Cor 11:22. Of pers.: have (at one’s disposal) (PAmh 92, 18 οὐχ ἕξω κοινωνόν and oft. in pap) Moses and the prophets Lk 16:29. παράκλητον an advocate, a helper 1J 2:1. οὐδένα ἔ. ἰσόψυχον Phil 2:20. ἄνθρωπον οὐκ ἔ. J 5:7.

ⓓ to have within oneself have σύλλημα ἔχει ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου she has something conceived through the Holy Spirit GJs 18:1. Var. constr. w. ἐν: of women ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ. be pregnant (γαστήρ 2) Mt 1:18, 23 (Is 7:14); 24:19; Mk 13:17; Lk 21:23; 1 Th 5:3; Rv 12:2. ἔ. τινὰ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ have someone in one’s heart Phil 1:7 (Ovid, Metam. 2, 641 aliquem clausum pectore habere). ἔ. τι ἐν ἑαυτῷ (Jos., Ant. 8, 171; cp. TestAbr A 3 p. 80, 14 [Stone p. 8] ἔκρυψεν τὸ μυστήριον, μόνος ἔχων ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ): ζωήν J 5:26. τὴν μαρτυρίαν 1J 5:10; τὸ ἀπόκριμα τοῦ θανάτου have a sentence of death within oneself 2 Cor 1:9.

ⓔ to have with oneself or in one’s company have μεθʼ ἑαυτοῦ (X., Cyr. 1, 4, 17) τινά someone Mt 15:30; 26:11; Mk 2:19; 14:7; J 12:8; AcPl Ha 8, 35; σὺν αὐτῷ 4:18.—The ptc. w. acc. = with (Diod S 12, 78, 1 ἔχων δύναμιν with a [military] force; 18, 61, 1 ὁ θρόνος ἔχων τὸ διάδημα the throne with the diadem; JosAs 27:8 ἔχοντες ἐσπασμένας τὰς ῥομφαίας ‘with their swords drawn’) ἀνέβησαν ἔχοντες αὐτόν they went up with him Lk 2:42 D.

② to stand in a close relationship to someone, have, have as

ⓐ of relatives πατέρα ἔ. J 8:41. ἀδελφούς Lk 16:28. ἄνδρα (Aristot., Cat. 15b, 27f λεγόμεθα δὲ καὶ γυναῖκα ἔχειν καὶ ἡ γυνὴ ἄνδρα; Tob 3:8 BA) be married (of the woman) J 4:17f; 1 Cor 7:2b, 13; Gal 4:27 (Is 54:1). γυναῖκα of the man (cp. Lucian, Tox. 45; SIG 1160 γυναικὸς Αἴ., τῆς νῦν ἔχει; PGM 13, 320; 1 Esdr 9:12, 18; Just., D. 141, 4 πολλὰς ἔσχον γυναίκας. As early as Od. 11, 603 Heracles ἔχει Ἥβην) 1 Cor 7:2a, 12, 29 (for the wordplay cp. Heliod. 1, 18, 4 in connection w. the handing over of a virgin: σὺ ἔχων οὐκ ἕξεις; Crates, 7th Ep. [p. 58, 8 Malherbe] πάντʼ ἔχοντες οὐδὲν ἔχετε). τέκνα Mt 21:28; 22:24; 1 Ti 3:4; 5:4; Tit 1:6. υἱούς (Artem. 5, 42 τὶς τρεῖς ἔχων υἱούς; cp. θυγατέρα TestAbr B 10 p. 114, 17 [Stone p.76]) Lk 15:11; Gal 4:22. σπέρμα have children Mt 22:25. W. acc. as obj. and in predicate (Ar. 8, 4 τούτους συνηγόρους ἔχοντες τῆς κακίας; 11, 3 ἔσχε μοιχὸν τὸν Ἄρην; Ath. 7, 2 ἔχομεν προφήτας μάρτυρας) ἔ. τινὰ πατέρα have someone as father Mt 3:9. ἔ. τινὰ γυναῖκα (w. γυναῖκα to be understood fr. the context) 14:4; cp. Mk 6:18; ὥστε γυναῖκά τινα τοῦ πατρὸς ἔ. that someone has taken his father’s wife (as his own wife: the simple ἔχειν in this sense as Plut., Cato Min. 21, 3; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 10 §34; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 147. Perh. an illicit relationship is meant, as Longus 4, 17; Hesychius Miles. [VI A.D.], Viri Ill. 4 JFlach [1880] ἔχω Λαί̈δα) 1 Cor 5:1 (Diod S 20, 33, 5 of a man who had illicit relations with his stepmother: ἔχειν λάθρᾳ τοῦ πατρὸς τὴν Ἀλκίαν).

ⓑ more gener. φίλον have a friend Lk 11:5. ἀσθενοῦντας have sick people Lk 4:40 and χήρας widows 1 Ti 5:16 to care for; παιδαγωγοὺς ἔ. 1 Cor 4:15. δοῦλον Lk 17:7. οἰκονόμον 16:1; κύριον ἔ. have a master, i.e. be under a master’s control Col 4:1; δεσπότην ἔ. 1 Ti 6:2; βασιλέα J 19:15. ἀρχιερέα Hb 4:14; 8:1. ποιμένα Mt 9:36. ἔχων ὑπʼ ἐμαυτὸν στρατιώτας I have soldiers under me Lk 7:8. W. direct obj. and predicate acc. ἔ. τινὰ ὑπηρέτην have someone as an assistant Ac 13:5 (Just., A I, 14, 1) ἔ. τινὰ τύπον have someone as an example Phil 3:17.—Of the relation of Christians to God and to Jesus ἔ. θεόν, τὸν πατέρα, τὸν υἱόν have God, the Father, the Son, i.e. be in communion w. them 1J 2:23; 2J 9; AcPl Ha 4, 7.—HHanse, at end of this entry.

③ to take a hold on someth., have, hold (to), grip

ⓐ of holding someth. in one’s hand ἔ. τι ἐν τῇ χειρί have someth. in one’s hand (since Il. 18, 505) Rv 1:16; 6:5; 10:2; 17:4. Of holding in the hand without ἐν τῇ χειρί (Josh 6:8; JosAs 5:7) ἔ. κιθάραν 5:8. λιβανωτὸν χρυσοῦν 8:3, cp. vs. 6; 14:17 and s. ἀλάβαστρον Mt 26:7 and Mk 14:3.

ⓑ of keeping someth. safe, a mina (a laborer’s wages for about three months) in a handkerchief keep safe Lk 19:20.

ⓒ of holding fast to matters of transcendent importance, fig. τὴν μαρτυρίαν Rv 6:9; 12:17; 19:10; the secret of Christian piety 1 Ti 3:9; an example of sound teaching 2 Ti 1:13; keep (Diod S 17, 93, 1 τὴν βασιλείαν ἔχειν=keep control) Mk 6:18.

ⓓ of states of being hold, hold in its grip, seize (Hom. et al.; PGiss 65a, 4 παρακαλῶ σε κύριέ μου, εἰδότα τὴν ἔχουσάν με συμφορὰν ἀπολῦσαί μοι; Job 21:6; Is 13:8; Jos., Ant. 3, 95 δέος εἶχε τοὺς Ἑβρ.; 5, 63; Just., D. 19, 3) εἶχεν αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις trembling and amazement had seized them Mk 16:8.

④ to carry/bear as accessory or part of a whole, have on, wear, of clothing, weapons, etc. (Hom. et al.; LXX; TestAbr B p. 114, 22 [Stone p. 76]) τὸ ἔνδυμα Mt 3:4; 22:12 (cp. ἔνδυσιν TestJob 25:7). κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων w. τὶ to be supplied while he wears (a covering) on his head 1 Cor 11:4. ἔ. θώρακας Rv 9:9, 17. ἔ. μάχαιραν wear a sword (Jos., Ant. 6, 190) J 18:10. Sim. of trees ἔ. φύλλα have leaves Mk 11:13 (ApcSed. 8:8).

⑤ be in a position to do someth., can, be able, ἔ. w. inf. foll. (Hom. et al.; cp. Eur., Hec. 761; Hdt. 1, 49; Pla., Phd. p. 76d; Demosth., Ep. 2, 22; Theocr. 10, 37 τὸν τρόπον οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν=I cannot specify the manner; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 21, 2, Hermot. 55; Epict. 1, 9, 32; 2, 2, 24 al.; Ael. Aristid. 51, 50 K.=27 p. 546 D.: οὐκ ἔχω λέγειν; PPetr II, 12, 1, 16; PAmh 131, 15; Pr 3:27; ApcEsdr 2:24; 3:7; 6:5; TestAbr A 8, p. 86, 13 [Stone p. 20]; Jos., Ant. 1, 338; 2, 58; Just., A I, 19, 5, D. 4, 6 οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν) ἔ. ἀποδοῦναι be able to pay Mt 18:25a; Lk 7:42; 14:14. μὴ ἔ. περισσότερον τι ποιῆσαι be in a position to do nothing more 12:4. οὐδὲν ἔ. ἀντειπεῖν be able to make a reply Ac 4:14; cp. Tit 2:8. ἔ. κατηγορεῖν αὐτοῦ J 8:6 (cp. 9a below, end). ἀσφαλές τι γράψαι οὐκ ἔχω I have nothing definite to write Ac 25:26a; cp. 26b. ἔ. μεταδιδόναι Eph 4:28a. ἔ. τὴν τούτων μνήμην ποιεῖσθαι be able to recall these things to mind 2 Pt 1:15. κατʼ οὐδενὸς εἶχεν μείζονος ὀμόσαι he could swear by no one greater Hb 6:13. In the same sense without the actual addition of the inf., which is automatically supplied fr. context (X., An. 2, 1, 9) ὸ̔ ἔσχεν (i.e. ποιῆσαι) ἐποίησεν she has done what she could Mk 14:8.

⑥ to have an opinion about someth., consider, look upon, view w. acc. as obj. and predicate acc. (POxy 292, 6 [c. 25 A.D.] ἔχειν αὐτὸν συνεσταμένον=look upon him as recommended; 787 [16 A.D.]; PGiss 71, 4; Job 30:9; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 16, 19; Ath. 32, 3 τοὺς μὲν υἱοὺς … νοοῦμεν, τοὺς δὲ ἀδελφούς ἔχομεν) ἔχε με παρῃτημένον consider me excused (= don’t expect me to come) Lk 14:18b, 19 (cp. Martial 2, 79 excusatum habeas me). τινὰ ἔντιμον ἔ. hold someone in honor Phil 2:29. ἔ. τινὰ ὡς προφήτην consider someone a prophet Mt 14:5; 21:26, 46 v.l. (cp. GNicod 5 [=Acta Pilati B 5 p. 297 Tdf.] ἔχειν [Jannes and Jambres] ὡς θεούς; Just., D. 47, 5 τὸν μετανοοῦντα … ὡς δίκαιον καὶ ἀναμάρτητον ἔχει). ἔ. τινὰ εἰς προφήτην consider someone a prophet Mt 21:46 (cp. Duris [III B.C.]: 76 Fgm. 21 Jac. ὸ̔ν εἰς θεοὺς ἔχουσιν). εἶχον τ. Ἰωάννην ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν they thought that John was really a prophet Mk 11:32.

⑦ to experience someth., have (freq. in auxiliary capacity CTurner, JTS 28, 1927, 357–60)

ⓐ of all conditions of body and soul (Hom. et al.; LXX)

α. of illness, et al. (ApcMos 6 νόσον καὶ πόνον ἔχω; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 305) ἀσθενείας have sicknesses/diseases Ac 28:9. μάστιγας physical troubles Mk 3:10. πληγὴν τῆς μαχαίρης Rv 13:14. θλῖψιν J 16:33b; 1 Cor 7:28; Rv 2:10. Esp. of possession by hostile spirits: δαιμόνιον ἔ. be possessed by an evil spirit Mt 11:18; Lk 7:33; 8:27; J 7:20; 8:48f, 52; 10:20. Βεελζεβούλ Mk 3:22. πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον vs. 30; 7:25; Ac 8:7. πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου Lk 4:33. πνεῦμα πονηρόν Ac 19:13. πνεῦμα ἄλαλον Mk 9:17. πνεῦμα ἀσθενείας spirit of sickness Lk 13:11. τὸν λεγιῶνα (the evil spirit called) Legion Mk 5:15.

β. gener. of conditions, characteristics, capabilities, emotions, inner possession: ἀγάπην ἔ. have love (cp. Diod S 3, 58, 3 φιλίαν ἔχειν; Just., D. 93, 4 φιλίαν ἢ ἀγάπην ἔχοντε) J 5:42; 13:35; 15:13; 1J 4:16; 1 Cor 13:1ff; 2 Cor 2:4; Phil 2:2; 1 Pt 4:8. ἀγνωσίαν θεοῦ fail to know God 1 Cor 15:34. ἁμαρτίαν J 9:41; 15:22a. ἀσθένειαν Hb 7:28. γνῶσιν 1 Cor 8:1, 10 (Just., A II, 13, 1; D. 28, 4). ἐλπίδα Ac 24:15; Ro 15:4; 2 Cor 3:12; 10:15; Eph 2:12; 1J 3:3 (Ath. 33, 1). ἐπιθυμίαν Phil 1:23. ἐπιποθίαν Ro 15:23b; ζῆλον ἔ. have zeal Ro 10:2. Have jealousy Js 3:14. θυμόν Rv 12:12. λύπην (ApcMos 3 p. 2, 16 Tdf.) J 16:21f; 2 Cor 2:3; Phil 2:27; μνείαν τινὸς ἔ. remember someone 1 Th 3:6. παρρησίαν Phlm 8; Hb 10:19; 1J 2:28; 3:21; 4:17; 5:14. πεποίθησιν 2 Cor 3:4; Phil 3:4. πίστιν Mt 17:20; 21:21; Mk 4:40; Ac 14:9; Ro 14:22; 1 Cor 13:2; 1 Ti 1:19 al. (Just., A I, 52, 1). προφητείαν have the gift of prophecy 1 Cor 13:2. σοφίαν (X., Mem. 2, 3, 10) Rv 17:9. συνείδησιν ἁμαρτιῶν Hb 10:2. καλὴν συνείδησιν 13:18; ἀγαθὴν ς. 1 Ti 1:19; 1 Pt 3:16; ἀπρόσκοπον ς. Ac 24:16; ὑπομονήν Rv 2:3. φόβον 1 Ti 5:20. χαράν Phlm 7. χάριν ἔ. τινί be grateful to someone Lk 17:9; 1 Ti 1:12; 2 Ti 1:3; σιγὴν ἔ. be silent Hs 9, 11, 5. ἀνάγκην ἔσχον I felt it necessary Jd 3 (HKoskenniemi, Studien zur Idee und Phraseologie des Griechischen Briefes bis 400 n. Chr. ’56, 78–87).

γ. of advantages, benefits, or comforts that one enjoys: ἔ. τὰ αἰτήματα to have been granted the requests 1J 5:15; ἀνάπαυσιν ἔ. have rest Rv 4:8; 14:11; ἀπόλαυσιν τινος ἔ. enjoy someth. Hb 11:25. βάθος γῆς Mt 13:5b; Mk 4:5b; γῆν πολλήν Mt 13:5a; Mk 4:5a. τὴν προσέλευσιν τὴν πρὸς τὸν κύριον AcPl Ha 8, 22f; εἰρήνην Ro 5:1. ἐλευθερίαν Gal 2:4. S. ἐξουσία, ἐπαγγελία, ἔπαινος, ζωή, ἰκμάς, καιρός, καρπός, καύχημα, καύχησις, λόγος, μισθός, νοῦς, πνεῦμα, προσαγωγή, πρόφασις, τιμή, χάρις (=favor), χάρισμα.

δ. of a sense of obligation in regard to someth.—W. dir. object have = have someth. over one, be under someth.: ἀνάγκην ἔχειν be under necessity 1 Cor 7:37a; w. inf. foll. have a need (ἀνάγκη 1) Lk 14:18; 23:16 v.l.; Hb 7:27; χρείαν ἔ. be in need abs. Eph 4:28b; τινός need someth. (Aeschyl. et al.; SIG 333, 20; 421, 35 al.; PPetr III, 42 G 9, 7 [III B.C.] ἐάν τινος χρείαν ἔχῃς; Ath. 13, 2 ποίας ἔτι χρείαν ἑκατόμβης ἔχει;) Mt 6:8; 9:12a; Mk 11:3; Lk 19:31, 34; J 13:29; 1 Cor 12:21; Hb 10:36 al.; w. inf. foll. (TestSol 13:2) Mt 3:14; 14:16; J 13:10; 1 Th 1:8; 4:9; 5:1. νόμον J 19:7. ἐπιταγήν 1 Cor 7:25. ἐντολήν (SIG 559, 9 ἔ. τὰς ἰντολάς; 1 Esdr 4:52; 2 Macc 3:13; Jos., Bell. 1, 261) Hb 7:5; 1J 2:7; 4:21; 2J 5; cp. J 14:21. διακονίαν 2 Cor 4:1. ἀγῶνα Phil 1:30; Col 2:1. πρᾶξιν Ro 12:4b. ἔγκλημα Ac 23:29. κόλασιν ApcPt Bodl. (ApcEsdr 1:22 p. 25, 17 Tdf.).

ε. of a sense of inevitability in respect to some action.—W. inf. foll. one must (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 1, 3 καθαιρεθῆναι ἔχεις=you must be deposed; Porphyr., Against the Christians 63 Harnack [ABA 1916] παθεῖν; Gen 18:31; Jos., Ant. 19, 348 τοῦ τεθνάναι; TestSol 5:12 σίδηρα ἔχεις φορέσαι; TestAbr A 18 p. 100, 22 [Stone p. 48] τοῦ βίου τοῦτου ἀπαλλάξαι εἶχες; Just., D. 51, 2 ἔργῳ πεισθήναι ὑμῶν ἐχόντων) βάπτισμα ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι I must undergo a baptism Lk 12:50. ἔχω σοί τι εἰπεῖν I have someth. to say to you (Lucian, Philops. 1 ἔχεις μοι εἰπεῖν. Without dat. Aelian, VH 2, 23; Jos., Ant. 16, 312) 7:40. καινόν σοι θέαμα ἔχω ἐξηγήσασθαι I have a wonderful new thing to tell you=‘I must tell you about something wonderful that I’ve just seen’ GJs 19:3. ἀπαγγεῖλαι Ac 23:17, 19; cp. vs. 18. πολλὰ γράφειν 2J 12; 3J 13.

ⓑ of temporal circumstances w. indications of time and age: πεντήκοντα ἔτη οὔπω ἔχεις you are not yet fifty years old J 8:57 (cp. Jos., Ant. 1, 198). τριάκοντα κ. ὀκτὼ ἔτη ἔχων ἐν τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ αὐτοῦ who had been sick for 38 years 5:5 (Cyranides p. 63, 25 πολὺν χρόνον ἔχων ἐν τῇ ἀρρωστίᾳ. W. cardinal numeral TestJob 26:1 δέκα ἑπτὰ ἔτη ἔχω ἐν ταῖς πληγαῖς; POxy 1862, 17 τέσσαρες μῆνας ἔχει. Mirac. S. Georgii 44, 7 [JAufhauser 1913] ἔσχεν … ἔτη ἑπτά); cp. Mt 9:20 v.l. τέσσαρας ἡμέρας ἔ. ἐν τῷ μνημείῳ have lain in the grave for four days J 11:17 (Jos., Ant. 7, 1 αὐτοῦ δύο ἡμέρας ἔχοντος ἐν τῇ Σεκέλλᾳ). πολὺν χρόνον ἔ. be (somewhere or in a certain condition) for a long time 5:6. ἡλικίαν ἔχειν be of age (Pla., Euthyd. 32, 306d; Plut., Mor. 547a; BGU 168 τοῖς ἀτελέσι ἔχουσι τὴν ἡλικίαν) 9:21, 23. τέλος ἔχειν have an end, be at an end (Lucian, Charon 17; UPZ 81 III, 20 [II A.D.] τέλος ἔχει πάντα; Ar. 4:2 ἀρχὴν καὶ τέλος) Mk 3:26; Lk 22:37 (on the latter pass. s. τέλος 2); cp. Hb 7:3.

⑧ as connective marker, to have or include in itself, bring about, cause w. acc. (Hom. et al.; Wsd 8:16) of ὑπομονή: ἔργον τέλειον Js 1:4. Of πίστις: ἔργα 2:17. Of φόβος: κόλασιν 1J 4:18. Of παρρησία: μεγάλην μισθαποδοσίαν Hb 10:35. Of πολυτέλεια: λύπην, χαράν Hs 1, 10. ἐσχάτην εὐλογίαν, ἥτις διαδοχὴν οὐκ ἔχει ultimate blessing, which has no successor GJs 6:2.

⑨ special combinations

ⓐ w. prep. ἐν: τὸν θεὸν ἔ. ἐν ἐπιγνώσει acknowledge God Ro 1:28 (cp. ἐν ὀργῇ ἔ. τινά=‘be angry at someone’, Thu. 2, 18, 5; 2, 21, 3; ἐν ὀρρωδίᾳ ἔ. τ. 2, 89, 1; ἐν ἡδονῇ ἔ. τ.=‘be glad to see someone’ 3, 9, 1; ἐν εὐνοίᾳ ἔ. Demosth. 18, 167). ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔ. 2 Cor 10:6 (ἕτοιμος b). ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔχει οὐδέν he has no hold on me J 14:30 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 32 §125 ἔχειν τι ἔν τινι=have someth. [hope of safety] in someone). κατά τινος: on 1 Cor 11:4 s. above 4. ἔ. τι κατά τινος have someth. against someone Mt 5:23; Mk 11:25; w. ὅτι foll. Rv 2:14. ἔ. κατά τινος w. sim. mng. Hm 2:2; Hs 9, 23, 2; w. ὅτι foll. Rv 2:4, 20. ἔ. τινὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον meet someone face to face Ac 25:16. μετά: ἔ. τι μετά τινος have someth. w. someone κρίματα lawsuits 1 Cor 6:7. περί: ἔ. περί τινος have (a word, a reference, an explanation) about someth. B 12:1; with adv. τελείως 10:10. πρός τινα have someth. against someone (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 21, 21 ὅσον τις ὑμῶν ἔχει πρὸς ἕτερον) Ac 24:19. ζητήματα ἔ. πρός τινα have differences w. someone (on points in question) 25:19. λόγον ἔ. πρός τινα 19:38. πρᾶγμα (=Lat. causa, ‘lawsuit’: BGU 19 I, 5; 361 II, 4) ἔ. πρός τινα (POxy 743, 19 [2 B.C.] εἰ πρὸς ἄλλους εἶχον πρᾶγμα; BGU 22:8) 1 Cor 6:1. ἵνα ἔχωσιν κατηγορίαν αὐτοῦ J 8:4 D (cp. 5 above). πρός τινα ἔ. μομφήν have a complaint against someone Col 3:13.

ⓑ τοῦτο ἔχεις ὅτι you have this (in your favor), that Rv 2:6. ἔ. ὁδόν be situated (a certain distance) away (cp. Peripl. Eryth. 37: Ὡραία ἔχουσα ὁδὸν ἡμερῶν ἑπτὰ ἀπὸ θαλάσσης) of the Mt. of Olives ὅ ἐστιν ἐγγὺς Ἰερουσαλὴμ σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν Ac 1:12.—ἴδε ἔχεις τὸ σόν here you have what is yours Mt 25:25. ἔχετε κουστωδίαν there you have a guard (=you can have a guard) 27:65 (cp. POxy 33 III, 4).

⑩ to be in some state or condition, act. intr. (spatially: Ath. 25, 1 οἱ ἄγγελοι … περὶ τόν ἀέρα ἔχοντες καὶ τὴν γῆν) w. adv. (Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX).

ⓐ impers. it is, the situation is (Himerius, Or. 48 [=Or. 14], 10 πῶς ὑμῖν ἔχειν ταῦτα δοκεῖ; =how does this situation seem to you? Just., D. 3, 5 τὸ … ὡσαύτως ἀεὶ ἔχων) ἄλλως 1 Ti 5:25. οὕτως (Antig. Car. 20; Cebes 4, 1; POxy 294, 11 [22 A.D.] εἰ ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει; TestSol 20:8; Jos., Ant. 15, 261; Just., D. 3:5 οὐχ οὕτως ἔχει) Ac 7:1; 12:15; 17:11; 24:9. τὸ καλῶς ἔχον what is right 1 Cl 14:2 (Michel 543, 12 [c. 200 B.C.] καλῶς ἔχον ἐστὶ τιμᾶσθαι τοὺς εὔνους ἄνδρας). τὸ νῦν ἔχον for the present Ac 24:25 (cp. Plut., Mor. 749a; Lucian, Anachars. 40, Catapl. 13 τὸ δὲ νῦν ἔχον μὴ διάτριβε; Tob 7:11).

ⓑ pers. be (in a certain way) πῶς ἔχουσιν how they are Ac 15:36 (cp. Gen 43:27; Jos., Ant. 4, 112). ἑτοίμως ἔ. be ready, hold oneself in readiness w. inf. foll. (BGU 80, 17 [II A.D.] ἡ Σωτηρία ἑτοίμως ἔχουσα καταγράψαι; Da 3:15 LXX; Jos., Ant. 13, 6; Just., D. 50, 1) 21:13; 2 Cor 12:14; 1 Pt 4:5. Also ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔ. 2 Cor 10:6 (s. ἕτοιμος b end). εὖ ἔ. be well-disposed πρός τινα toward someone Hs 9, 10, 7 (cp. Demosth. 9, 63 ἥδιον ἔχειν πρός τινα; SIG 1094, 4 φιλανθρώπως ἔχει πρὸς πάντας). κακῶς ἔ. be sick (Aristoph. et al.; POxy 935, 15; Ezk 34:4) Mt 4:24; 8:16; 9:12b; 17:15 v.l. (see πάσχω 2). καλῶς ἔ. be well, healthy (Epict. 1, 11, 4; PGen 54, 8; PFlor 230, 24) Mk 16:18; ἐσχάτως ἔ. (s. ἐσχάτως) 5:23; κομψότερον ἔ. feel better (κομψῶς ἔ.: Epict. 2, 18, 14; 3, 10, 13; PParis 18; PTebt 414, 10 ἐὰν κομψῶς σχῶ) J 4:52.

⑪ to be closely associated, in a variety of renderings, hold fast, be next to, be next, mid. (Hom. et al.) in NT only ptc.

ⓐ of proper situation or placement, esp. of inner belonging hold fast, cling to. The ‘to’ of belonging and the ‘with’ of association are expressed by the gen. (Theognis 1, 32 ἀεὶ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἔχεο=ever hold fast to the good people; X., Oec. 6, 1; Pla., Leg. 7, 811d; Lucian, Hermot. 69 ἐλπίδος οὐ μικρᾶς ἐχόμενα λέγεις; Sallust. 14 p. 26, 24 τ. θεῶν; Philo, Agr. 101 τὰ ἀρετῆς ἐχόμενα; Jos., Ant. 10, 204 οὐδὲν ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας ἐχόμενον, C. Ap. 1, 83 παλαιᾶς ἱστορίας ἐχόμενον; Just., A I, 68, 1 λόγου καὶ ἀληθείας ἔχεσθαι; Tat. 33, 1 μανίας ἔχεται πολλῆς; Ath., R. 48, 3 λόγῳ … ἀληθείας ἐχομένῳ) τὰ ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας things that belong to salvation Hb 6:9.

ⓑ of proximity

α. spatial, to be next to someth: ἐχόμενος neighboring (Isocr. 4, 96 νῆσος; Hdt. 1, 134 al. οἱ ἐχόμενοι=‘the neighbors’; Diod S 5, 15, 1; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 71 §294; Arrian, Peripl. 7, 2; PParis 51, 5 and oft. in pap; 1 Esdr 4:42; Jos., Ant. 6, 6 πρὸς τὰς ἐχομένας πόλεις; 11, 340) κωμοπόλεις Mk 1:38.

β. temporal, to be next, immediately following (Thu. 6, 3, 2 τ. ἐχομένου ἔτους al.; SIG 800, 15; PRev 34, 20; PAmh 49, 4; PTebt 124, 43; LXX) τῇ ἐχομένῃ (sc. ἡμέρᾳ, as Polyb. 3, 112, 1; 5, 13, 9; 2 Macc 12:39; Jos., Ant. 6, 235; 7, 18 al.; cp. εἰς τὴν ἐχομένην [i.e. ἡμέραν] PMich 173, 16 [III B.C.]) on the next day Lk 13:33 (v.l. ἐρχομένῃ); Ac 20:15; w. ἡμέρᾳ added (PAmh 50, 17) 21:26. τῷ ἐχομένῳ σαββάτῳ 13:44 v.l. (for ἐρχομένῳ; cp. 1 Macc 4:28, where the witnesses are similarly divided).—On the whole word HHanse, ‘Gott Haben’ in d. Antike u. im frühen Christentum ’39.—B. 641; 740. EDNT. M-M. TW. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἔχω
14 ἴδιος

ἴδιος, ία, ον (Hom.+; s. B-D-F §286; W-S. §22, 17; Rob. 691f; Mlt-Turner 191f.—For the spelling ἵδιος s. on ὀλίγος.)

① pert. to belonging or being related to oneself, one’s own

ⓐ in contrast to what is public property or belongs to another: private, one’s own (exclusively) (opp. κοινός, as Pla., Pol. 7, 535b; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 41 §171; Ath. 25, 4) οὐδὲ εἷς τι τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ ἔλεγεν ἴδιον εἶναι nor did anyone claim that anything the person had was private property or nor did anyone claim ownership of private possessions Ac 4:32; cp. D 4:8.

ⓑ in respect to circumstance or condition belonging to an individual (opp. ἀλλότριος) κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν δύναμιν according to each one’s capability (in contrast to that of others) Mt 25:15. τὴν δόξαν τὴν ἰ. ζητεῖ J 7:18; cp. 5:18, 43. ἕκαστος εἰς τὴν ἰδίαν πόλιν Lk 2:3 v.l. (for ἑαυτοῦ); sim. Mt 9:1 (noting the departure of Jesus to his home territory); cp. Dg 5:2. Christ ἐλευθερώσῃ πᾶσαν σάρκα διὰ τῆς ἰδίας σαρκός AcPlCor 2:6; cp. vs. 16 ἕκαστος τῇ ἰ. διαλέκτῳ ἡμῶν Ac 2:8; cp. 1:19 τῇ ἰ. διαλέκτῳ αὐτῶν, without pron. 2:6 (Tat. 26, 1 τὴν ἰ. αὐτῆς … λέξιν); ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει 3:12; cp. 28:30; τἡν ἰ. (δικαιοσύνην) Ro 10:3; cp. 11:24; 14:4f. ἕκαστος τ. ἴ. μισθὸν λήμψεται κατὰ τ. ἴ. κόπον each will receive wages in proportion to each one’s labor 1 Cor 3:8. ἑκάστη τὸν ἴδιον ἄνδρα her own husband 7:2 (Diog. L. 8, 43 πρὸς τὸν ἴδιον ἄνδρα πορεύεσθαι). ἕκαστος ἴδιον ἔχει χάρισμα 7:7. ἕκαστος τὸ ἴδιον δεῖπνον προλαμβάνει (s. προλαμβάνω 1c) 1 Cor 11:21 (Eratosth.: 241 Fgm. 16 Jac. of the festival known as Lagynophoria τὰ κομισθέντα αὑτοῖς δειπνοῦσι κατακλιθέντες … κ. ἐξ ἰδίας ἕκαστος λαγύνου παρʼ αὑτῶν φέροντες πίνουσιν ‘they dine on the things brought them … and they each drink from a flagon they have personally brought’. Evaluation: συνοίκια ταῦτα ῥυπαρά• ἀνάγκη γὰρ τὴν σύνοδον γίνεσθαι παμμιγοῦς ὄχλου ‘that’s some crummy banquet; it’s certainly a meeting of a motley crew’); cp. 1 Cor 9:7; 15:38. ἕκαστος τὸ ἴ. φορτίον βαστάσει Gal 6:5.—Tit 1:12; Hb 4:10; 7:27; 9:12; 13:12.—J 4:44 s. 2 and 3b.

② pert. to a striking connection or an exclusive relationship, own (with emphasis when expressed orally, or italicized in written form) κοπιῶμεν ταῖς ἰ. χερσίν with our own hands 1 Cor 4:12 (first pers., cp. UPZ 13, 14 [158 B.C.] εἰμὶ μετὰ τ. ἀδελφοῦ ἰδίου=w. my brother; TestJob 34:3 ἀναχωρήσωμεν εἰς τὰς ἰδίας χώρας). ἐν τῷ ἰ. ὀφθαλμῷ in your own eye Lk 6:41; 1 Th 2:14; 2 Pt 3:17 (here the stability of the orthodox is contrasted with loss of direction by those who are misled by error). Ac 1:7 (God’s authority in sharp contrast to the apostles’ interest in determining a schedule of events). ἰ. θέλημα own will and ἰδία καρδία own heart or mind 1 Cor 7:37ab contrast with μὴ ἔχων ἀνάγκην ‘not being under compulsion’; hence ἰ. is not simply equivalent to the possessive gen. in the phrase ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ. 1 Cor 6:18, ἰ. heightens the absurdity of sinning against one’s own body. Lk 10:34 (apparently the storyteller suggests that the wealthy Samaritan had more than one animal, but put his own at the service of the injured traveler). ἐπὶ τὸ ἴδιον ἐξέραμα 2 Pt 2:22 (cp. ἐπὶ τὸν ἑαυτοῦ ἔμετον Pr 26:11), with heightening of disgust. Some would put J 4:44 here (s. 1 end). εἰς τὸν ἴδιον ἀγρόν Mt 22:5 (the rude guest prefers the amenities of his own estate). Mk 4:34b (Jesus’ close followers in contrast to a large crowd). Ac 25:19 (emphasizing the esoteric nature of sectarian disputes). Js 1:14 (a contrast, not between types of desire but of sources of temptation: those who succumb have only themselves to blame). διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου through his own blood Ac 20:28 (so NRSV mg.; cp. the phrase SIG 547, 37; 1068, 16 ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων commonly associated with the gifts of generous officials, s. 4b. That the ‘blood’ would be associated with Jesus would be quite apparent to Luke’s publics).

③ pert. to a person, through substitution for a pronoun, own. Some of the passages cited in 2 may belong here. ἴ. is used for the gen. of αὐτός or the possess. pron., or for the possess. gen. ἑαυτοῦ, ἑαυτῶν (this use found in Hellenistic wr. [Schmidt 369], in Attic [Meisterhans³-Schw. 235] and Magnesian [Thieme 28f] ins; pap [Kuhring—s. ἀνά beg.—14; Mayser II/2, 73f]. S. also Dssm., B 120f [BS 123f], and against him Mlt. 87–91. LXX oft. uses ἴ. without emphasis to render the simple Hebr. personal suffix [Gen 47:18; Dt 15:2; Job 2:11; 7:10, 13; Pr 6:2 al.], but somet. also employs it without any basis for it in the original text [Job 24:12; Pr 9:12; 22:7; 27:15]. Da 1:10, where LXX has ἴ., Theod. uses μου. 1 Esdr 5:8 εἰς τὴν ἰδίαν πόλιν=2 Esdr 2:1 εἰς πόλιν αὐτοῦ; Mt 9:1 is formally sim., but its position in the narrative suggests placement in 1)

ⓐ with the second pers. (Jos., Bell. 6, 346 ἰδίαις χερσίν=w. your own hands). Eph 5:22 (cp. vs. 28 τὰς ἑαυτῶν γυναῖκας); 1 Th 4:11; 1 Pt 3:1.

ⓑ with the third pers. ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ πατρίδι J 4:44 (cp. ἐν τῇ πατρίδι αὐτοῦ: Mt 13:57; Mk 6:4; Lk 4:24, but J 4:44 is expressed in a slightly difft. form and may therefore belong in 1b above); Mt 25:14; 15:20 v.l.; J 1:41 (UPZ 13, s. 2 above: ἀδ. ἴ.); Ac 1:19; 24:24; 1 Ti 6:1; Tit 2:5, 9; 1 Pt 3:5; MPol 17:3; AcPl Ha 3, 21; 4, 27 (context uncertain); τὸ ἴδιον πλάσμα AcPlCor 2:12, 1; ἴδιον χωρίον Papias (3:3).

④ as subst., person or thing associated with an entity

ⓐ associates, relations οἱ ἴδιοι (comrades in battle: Polyaenus, Exc. 14, 20; SIG 709, 19; 22; 2 Macc 12:22; Jos., Bell. 1, 42, Ant. 12, 405; compatriots: ViHab 5 [p. 86, 7 Sch.]; Philo, Mos. 1, 177) fellow-Christians Ac 4:23; 24:23 (Just., D. 121, 3). The disciples (e.g., of a philosopher: Epict. 3, 8, 7) J 13:1. Relatives (BGU 37; POxy 932; PFay 110; 111; 112; 116; 122 al.; Vett. Val. 70, 5 ὑπὸ ἰδίων κ. φίλων; Sir 11:34; Just., A II, 7, 2 σὺν τοῖς ἰδίοις … Νῶε and D. 138, 2 Νῶε … μετὰ τῶν ἰδίων) 1 Ti 5:8; J 1:11b (the worshipers of a god are also so called: Herm. Wr. 1, 31).—Sg. τὸν ἴδιον J 15:19 v.l. (s. b below).

ⓑ home, possessions τὰ ἴδια home (Polyb. 2, 57, 5; 3, 99, 4; Appian, Iber. 23; Peripl. Eryth. 65 εἰς τὰ ἴδια; POxy 4, 9f ἡ ἀνωτέρα ψυχὴ τ. ἴδια γεινώσκει; 487, 18; Esth 5:10; 6:12; 1 Esdr 6:31 [τὰ ἴδια αὐτοῦ=2 Esdr 6:11 ἡ οἰκία αὐτοῦ]; 3 Macc 6:27, 37; 7:8; Jos., Ant. 8, 405; 416, Bell. 1, 666; 4, 528) J 16:32 (EFascher, ZNW 39, ’41, 171–230); 19:27; Ac 5:18 D; 14:18 v.l.; 21:6; AcPl Ha 8, 5. Many (e.g. Goodsp, Probs. 87f; 94–96; Field, Notes 84; RSV; but not Bultmann 34f; NRSV) prefer this sense for J 1:11a and Lk 18:28; another probability in both these pass. is property, possessions (POxy 489, 4; 490, 3; 491, 3; 492, 4 al.). ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων from his own well-stocked supply (oft. in ins e.g. fr. Magn. and Priene, also SIG 547, 37; 1068, 16 [in such ins the focus is on the generosity of public-spirited officals who use their own resources to meet public needs]; Jos., Ant. 12, 158) J 8:44. The sg. can also be used in this way τὸ ἴδιον (SIG 1257, 3; BGU 1118, 31 [22 B.C.]) J 15:19 (v.l. τὸν ἴδιον, s. a above).—τὰ ἴδια one’s own affairs (X., Mem. 3, 4, 12; 2 Macc 9:20; 11:23 v.l., 26, 29) 1 Th 4:11, here πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια=mind your own business.— Jd 6 of one’s proper sphere.

⑤ pert. to a particular individual, by oneself, privately, adv. ἰδίᾳ (Aristoph., Thu.; Diod S 20, 21, 5 et al.; ins, pap, 2 Macc 4:34; Philo; Jos., Bell. 4, 224, C. Ap. 1, 225; Ath. 8, 1f) 1 Cor 12:11; IMg 7:1.—κατʼ ἰδίαν (Machon, Fgm. 11 vs. 121 [in Athen. 8, 349b]; Polyb. 4, 84, 8; Diod S 1, 21, 6; also ins [SIG 1157, 12 καὶ κατὰ κοινὸν καὶ κατʼ ἰδίαν ἑκάστῳ al.]; 2 Macc 4:5; 14:21; JosAs 7:1; Philo, Sacr. Abel. 136; Just., D. 5, 2) privately, by oneself (opp. κοινῇ: Jos., Ant. 4, 310) Mt 14:13, 23; 17:1, 19; 20:17; 24:3; Mk 4:34a; 6:31f; 7:33 (Diod S 18, 49, 2 ἕκαστον ἐκλαμβάνων κατʼ ἰδίαν=‘he took each one aside’); 9:2 (w. μόνος added), 28; 13:3; Lk 9:10; 10:23; Ac 23:19; Gal 2:2 (on the separate meeting cp. Jos., Bell. 2, 199 τ. δυνατοὺς κατʼ ἰδίαν κ. τὸ πλῆθος ἐν κοινῷ συλλέγων; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 40 §170); ISm 7:2.

⑥ pert. to being distinctively characteristic of some entity, belonging to/peculiar to an individual ἕκαστον δένδρον ἐκ τ. ἰδίου καρποῦ γινώσκεται every tree is known by its own fruit Lk 6:44. τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα his (own) sheep J 10:3f. εἰς τὸν τόπον τ. ἴδιον to his own place (= the place where he belonged) Ac 1:25; cp. 20:28. The expression τοῦ ἰδίου υἱοῦ οὐκ ἐφείσατο Ro 8:32 emphasizes the extraordinary nature of God’s gift: did not spare his very own Son (Paul’s association here with the ref. to pandemic generosity, ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πάντων παρέδωκεν αὐτο͂ν, contributes a semantic component to ἰ. in this pass.; for the pandemic theme see e.g. OGI 339, 29f; for donation of one’s own resources, ibid. 104; IGR 739, II, 59–62. For the term ὁ ἴδιος υἱός, but in difft. thematic contexts, see e.g. Diod S 17, 80, 1 of Parmenio; 17, 118, 1 of Antipater. In relating an instance in which a son was not spared Polyaenus 8, 13 has υἱὸς αὐτοῦ, evidently without emphasis, but Exc. 3, 7 inserts ἴδιος υἱός to emphasize the gravity of an officer’s own son violating an order.). 1 Cor 7:4ab. ἕκαστος ἐν. τ. ἰδίῳ τάγματι each one in his (own) turn 15:23 (cp. En 2:1 τ. ἰ. τάξιν). καιροὶ ἴδιοι the proper time (cp. Diod S 1, 50, 7 ἐν τοῖς ἰδίοις χρόνοις; likew. 5, 80, 3; Jos., Ant. 11, 171; Ps.-Clemens, Hom. 3, 16; TestSol 6:3 ἐν καιρῷ ἰ.; Just., D. 131, 4 πρὸ τῶν ἰ. καιρῶν; Mel., P. 38, 258ff) 1 Ti 2:6; 6:15; Tit 1:3; 1 Cl 20:4; cp. 1 Ti 3:4f, 12; 4:2; 5:4. ἴδιαι λειτουργίαι … ἴδιος ὁ τόπος … ἴδιαι διακονίαι in each case proper: ministrations, … place, … services 1 Cl 40:5.—In ἰδία ἐπίλυσις 2 Pt 1:20 one’s own private interpretation is contrasted with the meaning intended by the author himself or with the interpretation of another person who is authorized or competent (s. ἐπίλυσις and WWeeda, NThSt 2, 1919, 129–35).—All these pass. are close to mng. 3; it is esp. difficult to fix the boundaries here.—DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἴδιος
15 κατά

κατά [(A)][ κᾰτᾰ], poet. καταί acc. to A.D.Synt.309.28, found in Compds., as καταιβάτης: Prep. with gen. or acc.:—

A downwards.

A WITH GEN.,

I denoting motion from above, down from, βῆ δὲ κατ' Οὐλύμποιο καρήνων, κατ' Ἰδαίων ὀρέων, βαλέειν κ. πέτρης, Il. 22.187, 16.677, Od.14.399; κατ' οὐρανοῦ εἰλήλουθας Il.6.128
; καθ' ἵππων ἀΐξαντε ib. 232; δάκρυα.. κ. βλεφάρων Χαμάδις ῥέε 17.438
; ἵεις σαυτὸν κ. τοῦ τείχους Ar.V. 355
; ἁλόμενοι κ. τῆς πέτρας X.An.4.2.17
; κ. τῶν πετρῶν ὦσαι Pl.Phdr. 229c
; κ. κρημνῶν ῥιφέντες Id.Lg. 944a
:— for κατ' ἄκρης v. ἄκρα: Μοῖσα κ. στόματος Χέε νέκταρ Theoc.7.82
(but perh. in sense 11.1).

II denoting downward motion,

1 down upon or over, κ. Χθονὸς ὄμματα πήξας Il.3.217
; of the dying, κατὰ.. ὀφθαλμῶν κέχυτ' ἀχλύς a cloud settled upon the eyes, 5.696, cf. 20.321; τὸν δὲ κατ' ὀφθαλμῶν.. νὺξ ἐκάλυψεν 13.580
; φᾶρος κὰκ κεφαλῆς εἴρυσσε down over.., Od.8.85; [ κόπρος] κ. σπείους κέχυτο.. πολλή 9.330
; ὕδωρ κ. Χειρός, v. Χείρ; μύρον κ. τῆς κεφαλῆς καταχέαντες Pl.R. 398a; νάρκη μου κ. τῆς Χειρὸς καταχεῖται Ar.V. 713
; κ. τῆς τραπέζης καταπάσας τέφραν Id.Nu. 177
; ξαίνειν κ. τοῦ νώτου πολλὰς [ πληγάς] D.19.197; ἐσκεδασμένοι κ. τῆς Χώρας Plb.1.17.10
; οἱ κ. νώτου πονοῦντες Id.3.19.7
; ῥόπαλον ἤλασα κὰκ κεφαλῆς Theoc.25.256
; κ. κόρρης παίειν, = ἐπὶ κόρρης, Luc.Cat.12, al.

b Geom., along, upon, πίπτειν κατ' [ εὐθείας] Archim.Sph.Cyl.1 Def.2; αἱ γωνίαι κ. κύκλων περιφερειῶν ἐνεχθήσονται will move on.., ib.1.23, al., cf. Aristarch.Sam.1.

2 down into, νέκταρ στάξε κ. ῥινῶν Il.19.39
; of a dart, κ. γαίης ᾤχετο 13.504
, etc.; ἔθηκε κατ' ὄχθης μείλινον ἔγχος 21.172
; ψυχὴ κ. Χθονὸς ᾤχετο 23.100
; κ. γᾶς underground, Pi.O.2.59; κατ' ὕδατος under water, Hdt.2.149; [ ποταμὸς] δὺς κ. τῆς γῆς Pl.Phd.
113c, cf. Ti. 25d; κ. γῆς σύμεναι A.Eu. 1007
(anap.); κ. Χθονὸς κρύψαι to bury. S.Ant.24; ὁ κ. γῆς one dead and buried, X.Cyr.4.6.5; οἱ κ. Χθονὸς θεοί A.Pers. 689
, etc.; θεοὶ<οἱ> κ. γᾶς Id.Ch. 475
(lyr.), etc.; so κ. θαλάσσης ἀφανίζεσθαι, καταδεδυκέναι, Hdt.7.6, 235; also βᾶτε κατ' ἀντιθύρων go down by or through.., S.El. 1433.

3 later, towards a point, τοξεύειν κ. σκοποῦ to shoot at, Hdn.6.7.8; κατ' ἰχνῶν τινος ὁδεύειν Luc.Rh.Pr.9
.

4 of vows or oaths, by, καθ' ἡμῶν ὀμνύναι D.29.26
, cf. 54.38; ἐπιορκήσασα κ. τῶν παίδων Lys.32.13
; esp. of the victims, etc., over which the oath is taken, ὀμνυόντων τὸν ἐπιχώριον ὅρκον καθ' ἱερῶν τελείων Foed. ap. Th.5.47, cf. Arist.Ath.29.5, Foed.Delph.Pell.1A9, etc.; κ. τῶν νικητηρίων εὐξάμενοι D.Ep.1.16
; also κατ' ἐξωλείας ὀμνύναι to imprecate destruction on oneself, Id.21.119; κατ' ἐξ. ἐπιορκεῖν Id.57.22
.

b to make a vow towards, i.e. make a vow of offering.., κ. Χιλίων εὐχὴν ποιήσασθαι Χιμάρων Ar. Eq. 660
.

5 in hostile sense, against, A.Ch. 221, S.Aj. 304, etc.; κ. πάντων φύεσθαι D.18.19
; esp. of judges giving sentence against a person, A.Th. 198, S.Aj. 449, etc.; ψεύδεσθαι κατά τινος Lys.22.7
; λέγειν κατά τινος κακά S.Ph.65
, cf. X.HG1.5.2, etc.; of speeches, [ λόγος] κ. Μειδίου, etc. (opp. πρὸς Λεπτίνην, in reply to L.); δῶρα εἰληφέναι κατά τινος Din.3.6
, cf. 18.

6 of Time, for, μισθοῦν κ. εἴκοσι ἐτῶν IG12.94.37
; κ. βίου for life, Tab.Heracl.1.50; κὰπ παντὸς Χρόνοι IG9(2).517.20
([place name] Larissa ) (but κ. παντὸς τοῦ Χρόνου σκέψασθε D. 22.72
falls under 7); κ. παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος ἀείμνηστον Lycurg.7
.

7 in respect of, concerning, μὴ κατ' ἀνθρώπων σκόπει μόνον τοῦτο Pl. Phd. 70d
; κ. τῶν ἄλλων τεχνῶν τοιαῦτα εὑρήσομεν Id.Sph. 253b
; οἱ κ. Δημοσθένους ἔπαινοι praises bestowed on D., Aeschin.3.50; ἐρεῖν or λέγειν κατά τινος to say of one, Pl.Ap. 37b, Prt. 323b, etc.; εἰ κ. θηλείας φαίης A.D.Synt.198.10
; εἴπερ ἕν γέ τι ζητεῖς κ. πάντων Pl.Men. 73d
, cf. 74b; ὅπερ εἴρηται καθόλου κ. πασῶν τῶν πολιτειῶν Arist.Pol. 1307b2
; freq. in the Logic of Arist., κατά τινος λέγεσθαι or κατηγορεῖσθαι to be predicated of.., Int.16b10, Cat. 1b10, etc.; καταφῆσαί (or ἀποφῆσαί) τι κατά τινος to affirm (or deny) of.., Metaph. 1007b21; so κ. τινὸς ὑπάρχειν Int. 16b13
: and in Adv. καθόλου (q.v.).

B WITH Acc.,

I of motion downwards, κ. ῥόον down stream, Od.14.254, Il.12.33; opp. ἀνὰ τὸν ποταμόν, Hdt.2.96; κ. τὸν ποταμόν, κ. τὸ ὑδάτιον, Id.1.194, Pl.Phdr. 229a; κατ' οὖρον ἰέναι, ῥεῖν, down (i.e. with) the wind, A.Th. 690, S.Tr. 468; κ. πνεῦμα, κατ' ἄνεμον ἵστασθαι to leeward, Arist.HA 535a19, 560b13, Dsc.4.153.

2 with or without signf. of motion, on, over, throughout a space, freq. in Hom., καθ' Ἑλλάδα καὶ μέσον Ἄργος Od.1.344
; κατ' Ἀχαΐδα, κ. Τροίην, Il.11.770, 9.329; κατ' ἠερόεντα κέλευθα Od.20.64
; κ. πόντον, κῦμα, ὕλην, Il.4.276, 6.136, 3.151; κ. πτόλιν Od.2.383
; κ. ἄστυ, οἶκον, Il.18.286, 6.56; κ. ὅμιλον, στρατόν, 3.36, 1.229; κ. κλισίας τε νέας τε ib. 487; πόλεμον κάτα δακρυόεντα 17.512
; κ. ὑσμίνην, μόθον, κλόνον, 5.84, 18.159, 16.331; τὸ ὕδωρ κ. τοὺς ταφροὺς ἐχώρει X.Cyr.7.5.16
, etc. (in later Gr.of motion to a place, κ. τὴν Ἰταλίαν Zos.3.1
); καθ' Ἑλλάδα A.Ag. 578
; κ. πτόλιν Id.Th.6
; αἱ σκηναὶ αἱ κ. τὴν ἀγοράν D.18.169
; τὰ κατ' ἀγροὺς Διονύσια Aeschin.1.157
, etc.; κ. τὸ προάστιον Hdt.3.54
; τύμβον κατ' αὐτόν A. Th. 528
, cf. Supp. 869 (lyr.): Geom., at a point, Euc.1.1,al.; τέμνειν [ σφαῖραν] κ. κύκλον in a circle, Archim.Aren.1.17; also, in the region of, οἱ κ. τὸν ἥλιον γινόμενοι ἀστέρες Gem.12.7
: freq. in Hom. in describing the place of a wound, βαλεῖν κ. στῆθος, γαστέρα, etc., Il.11.108, 16.465, al.; νύξε κ. δεξιὸν ὦμον 5.46
; οὔτασε κατ' ἰσχίον 11.339
; so βαλεῖν κατ' ἀσπίδα, κ. ζωστῆρα, 5.537, 615; βέλος κ. καίριον ἦλθεν struck upon a vital part, v.l. in 11.439: metaph., ἄχος κ. φρένα τύψε 19.125
: generally, κ. φρένα καὶ κατὰ θυμόν in heart and soul, 4.163, al.

3 opposite, over against, κ. Σινώπην πόλιν Hdt.1.76
, cf. 2.148, Th.2.30, etc.; ἀνὴρ κατ' ἄνδρα A.Th. 505
; μολὼν.. μοι κ. στόμα Id.Ch. 573
; κατ' ὀφθαλμούς τινος LXX 2 Ki.12.11
; οἱ μὲν Ἀθηναῖοι κ. Λακεδαιμονίους ἐγένοντο X.HG4.2.18
; κατ' Ἀχαιοὺς ἀντετάχθησαν ibid.; ἐν συμποσίῳ.., περίμενε, μέχρις ἂν γένηται κατὰ σέ Epict.Ench. 15
, cf. D.L.7.108.

II distributively, of a whole divided into parts, κρῖν' ἄνδρας κ. φῦλα, κ. φρήτρας by tribes, by clans, Il.2.362; κ. σφέας μαχέονται by themselves, separately, ib. 366, cf. Th.4.64; ἐσκήνουν κ. τάξεις X.Cyr.2.1.25
; αὐτὴ καθ' αὑτήν A.Pr. 1013
; κ. κώμας κατοικημένοι in separate villages, Hdt.1.96; κατ' ἑωυτοὺς ἕκαστοι ἐτράποντο each to his own home, Id.5.15; κ. πόλεις ἀποπλεῦσαι, διαλυθῆναι, Th.1.89, 3.1: στρατιὰ κ. ἕνδεκα μέρη κεκοσμημένη Pl.Phdr. 247a
; later οἱ κατ' ἄνδρα λόγοι PLond.2.259.72
(i A. D.), cf. D.Chr.32.6, etc.; ἡ κατ' οἰκίαν ἀπογραφή PLond.3.904.20
(ii A.D.), etc.; κατ' ἔπος word by word, Ar.Ra. 802; κατ' ὄνομα individually, 3 Ep.Jo.15, etc.; παῖδα κ. κρήνην at each fount a boy, Lyr.Alex.Adesp.37.13, cf. POxy 2108.9 (iii A.D.).

2 of Time, καθ' ἡμέραν, κατ' ἦμαρ, day by day, daily, v. ἡμέρα 111; καθ' ἑνιαυτόν, κατ' ἔτος, Test.Epict.6.24, Ev.Luc.2.41, etc.; κ. μῆνα POxy.275.18
(i A.D.).

3 of Numbers, by so many at a time, καθ' ἕνα one at a time, individually, Hdt.7.104 (later
τὸ καθ' ἕν
detailed list, PTeb.47.34
(ii B.C.), etc.); κ. μίαν τε καὶ δύο by ones and twos, Hdt.4.113; δύο μνέαι τεταγμέναι κατ' ἄνδρα αἰχμάλωτον ἕκαστον Id.6.79
; ἐκ τῶν συμμάχων ἐξελέγετο κατ' ὀλίγους Id.8.113
; κ. τὰς πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι μνᾶς πεντακοσίας δραχμὰς εἰσφέρειν to pay 500 drachmae on every 25 minae, D.27.7;
κ. διακοσίας καὶ τριακοσίας ὁμοῦ τι τάλαντον διακεχρημένον
in separate sums of
200
and 300 drachmae, Id.27.11; of ships, κ. μίαν (sc. ναῦν) in column, Th.2.90; κ. μίαν ναῦν ἐπιτάττειν Plb.1.26.12
, cf. Th.2.84: Geom., μετρεῖν, μετρεισθαι κατά.. , measure, be measured a certain number of times, Euc.7 Def.8,9,al.; μετρεῖν κ. τὰς ἐν τῷ Β μονάδας as many times as there are units in B, Id.7.16.

III of direction towards an object or purpose, πλεῖν κ. πρῆξιν on a business, for or after a matter, Od. 3.72, 9.253; πλάζεσθαι κ. ληΐδα to rove in search of booty, 3.106; κ. ληΐην ἐκπλῶσαι Hdt.2.152
; ἔβη κ. δαῖτα Il.1.424
; ἐπιδημεῖν κατ' ἐμπορίαν IG22.141.32
, cf. Arist.Ath.11.1; κ. Χρέος τινὸς ἐλθεῖν come to seek his help, consult him, Od.11.479, etc.; ἵεται κ. τὴν φωνήν Hdt.2.70
; κ. θέαν ἥκειν to have come for the purpose of seeing, Th.6.31; κ. πλοῦν ἤδη ὤν Id.7.31
; καθ' ἁρπαγὴν ἐσκεδασμένοι X.An.3.5.2
; κ. τί; for what purpose? why? Ar.Nu. 239.

2 of pursuit, κ. πόδας τινὸς ἐλαύνειν Hdt.9.89
; simply κ. τινά after him, Id.1.84; ἰέναι κ. τοὺς ἄλλους Id.9.53
; κατ' ἴχνος on the track, S.Aj.32, A.Ag. 695 (lyr.); ὥσπερ κατ' ἴχνη κ. τὰ νῦν εἰρημένα ζῆν Pl.Phd. 115b
.

3 Geom., in adverbial phrases, κ. κάθετον in the same vertical line, Archim. Quadr.6; κατ' εὐθεῖάν τινι in the same straight line with.., Papp. 58.7.

IV of fitness or conformity, in accordance with, κ. θυμόν Il.1.136
; καθ' ἡμέτερον νόον after our liking, 9.108; κ. νόον πρήξωμεν Hdt.4.97
; κ. μοῖραν as is meet and right, Il.1.286; κατ' αἶσαν, κ. κόσμον, 10.445, 472; κ. νόμον Hes.Th. 417
; κὰν νόμον Pi.O.8.78
; κ. τοὺς νόμους IG22.1227.15
; αἰτίαν καθ' ἥντινα for what cause, A.Pr. 228; κατ' ἔχθραν, κ. φθόνον, for (i.e. because of) hatred, envy, Id.Supp. 336, Eu. 686; καθ' ἡδονήν τι δρᾶν, ποιεῖν, do as one pleases, Th. 2.37,53; κ. τὸ ἔχθος τὸ Θεσσαλῶν Hdt.8.30
, cf. 9.38; κ. φιλίαν, κατ' ἔχθος, Th.1.60, 103, etc.; κατ' ἄλλο μὲν οὐδέν, ὅτι δέ.. for no other reason but that.., Pl.Phdr. 229d; κ. δύναμιν to the best of one's power, Hdt.3.142, etc. ( κὰδ δ. Hes.Op. 336); κ. τρόπον διοικεῖν arrange suitably, Isoc.2.6,al.; κατ' εὐνοίην with goodwill, Hdt.6.108; κ. τὰ παρηγγελμένα X.An.2.2.8
, etc.; in quotations, according to, κατ' Αἰσχύλον Ar.Th. 134
; κ. Πίνδαρον Pl.Phdr. 227b
, etc.

2 in relation to, concerning, τὰ κατ' ἀνθρώπους = τὰ ἀνθρώπινα, A.Eu. 930, 310; τὰ κ. τὸν Τέλλον Hdt.1.31
; τὰ κ. τὴν Κύρου τελευτήν ib. 214; τὰ κ. πόλεμον military matters, Aeschin.1.181; αἱ κ. τὴν πόλιν οἰκονομίαι (opp. αἱ πολεμικαὶ πράξεις ) the management of public affairs, Din. 1.97; τὰ κ. τὰς θυσίας SIG506.7
(Delph., iii B.C.); so τὸ κατ' ὑμέας as far as concerns you, Hdt.7.158; τὸ κατ' ἐμέ as far as I am concerned, D.18.247; κ. τοῦτο in this respect, Hdt.5.3, etc.; κ. ταὐτά in the same way, Id.2.20; καθ' ὅτι so far as, Th.1.82, etc.

3 in Comparisons, corresponding with, after the fashion of, κρομύοιο λοπὸν κ. like the coat of an onion, dub. in Od.19.233; μέλος κ. Φοίνισσαν ἐμπολὰν πέμπεται Pi.P.2.67
; κ. Μιθραδάτην answering to the description of him, Hdt.1.121; τὴν ἰδέαν κ. πνιγέα like an oven in appearance, Ar.Av. 1001; κηδεῦσαι καθ' ἑαυτόν to marry in one's own rank of life, A.Pr. 890; οὐ κατ' ἄνθρωπον φρονεῖν Id.Th. 425
; λέγω κατ' ἄνδρα, μὴ θεόν, σέβειν ἐμέ Id.Ag. 925
; οὐ κατὰ σέ none of your sort, Chionid.1 (but ἵνα προσείπω σε κατὰ σέ to address you in your own style, Pl.Grg. 467c); τὸ κατ' ἐμὲ καὶ οὐ κατ' ἐμέ Arr.Epict.1.28.5
; οὐ κ. τὰς Μειδίου λῃτουργίας D.21.169
; ἡ βασιλεία κ. τὴν ἀριστοκρατίαν ἐστί Arist.Pol. 1310b3
: freq. after a [comp] Comp., μέζων ἢ κατ' ἀνθρώπων φύσιν Hdt.8.38
, cf. Pl.Ap. 20e, etc.; μείζω ἢ κ. δάκρυα too great for tears, Th.7.75; ἤθεα βαθύτερα ἢ κ. Θρήϊκας morerefined than was common among the Thracians, Hdt.4.95.

V by the favour of a god, etc., κ. δαίμονα Pi.O.9.28
, cf. P.8.68; κ. θεῖον Ar.Eq. 147
codd. (κ. θεὸν Cobet); κ. τύχην τινά D.48.24
.

VI of round numbers (v. infr. v11.2), nearly, about, κ. Χίλια ἑξακόσια ἔτεα 1600
years more or less, Hdt.2.145, cf. 6.44, al.; κατ' οὐδέν next to nothing, Pl.Plt. 302b.

VII of Time, during or in the course of a period, κ. τὸν πόλεμον Hdt.7.137
; καθ' ἡμέραν, κατ' ἦμαρ, by day, A. Ch. 818, Ag. 668; κατ' εὐφρόνην Id.Pers. 221
; κ. Χειμῶνα, κ. θερείαν, PLille 1r14 (iii B.C.), PTeb.27.60 (ii B.C.).

2 about, κ. τὸν αὐτὸν τοῦτον Χρόνον Hdt.3.131
, etc.; κ. τοὺς θανάτους τῶν βασιλέων Id.6.58
; esp. with names of persons, κ. Ἄμασιν βασιλεύοντα about the time of Amasis, Id.2.134; κ. τὸν κ. Κροῖσον Χρόνον Id.1.67
; οἱ κατ' ἐκεῖνον (sc. τὸν Ἀλκιβιάδην) ὑμέτεροι πρόγονοι D.21.146
(v.l. κατ' ἐκ. τὸν Χρόνον) ; κ. τοὺς Ἡρακλείδας X.Lac.10.8
; οἱ καθ' ἑαυτοὺς ἄνθρωποι their contemporaries, Id.Mem.3.5.10.

3 καθ' ἕτος this year, SIG 284.24 (Erythrae, iv B.C.), OGI458.64 (i B.C./iA.D.), CIG3641b5,38 ([place name] Lampsacus).

VIII periphrastically with abstract Subst., κατ' ἡσυχίην, κ. τάχος, = ἡσύχως, ταχέως, Hdt.1.9,7.178; κ. κράτος by force, X.HG2.1.19, etc.; κ. μέρος partially, Arist.Po. 1456a16; individually, severally, Pl.Tht. 157b, Lg. 835a; κ. φύσιν naturally, Hdt. 2.38, Pl.R. 428e; κ. τὴν τέχνην skilfully, Luc.DDeor.20.7; οὔτ' ἐμοὶ λέγειν καθ' ἡδονήν [ ἐστι] it is not pleasant for me to tell you, A.Pr. 263.

C Position: κατά may follow both its cases, and is then written with anastr. κάτα, as Il.20.221, etc.; so also in tmesi, when it follows its Verb, 17.91.

D abs. as ADV. in all the above senses, esp. like κάτω, downwards, from above, down, freq. in Hom.

E κατά in COMPOS.,

I downwards, down, as in καταβαίνω, καταβάλλω, κατάκειμαι, καταπέμπω, καταπίπτω, καταπλέω 1
.

II in answer to, in accordance with, as in κατᾴδω ( occino), καταινέω, καταθύμιος.

III against, in hostile sense (cf. A.11.5), as in καταγιγνώσκω, κατακρίνω, καταψηφίζομαι: more rarely with a Subst., as καταδίκη.

IV back, back again, as in κάτειμι, καταπορεύομαι, καταπλέω 11
.

V freq. only to strengthen the notion of the simple word, as in κατακόπτω, κατακτείνω, καταφαγεῖν, etc.; also with Substs. and Adjs., as in κατάδηλος, κάτοξος.

VI sts. to give a trans. force to an intr. Verb, our be-, as in καταθρηνέω bewail.

VII implying waste or consumption, as in καταλειτουργέω, καθιπποτροφέω, καταζευγοτροφέω: and generally in a disparaging sense, as in καταγιγνώσκω 1
.

F κατά as a Prep. was shortd. in some dialects, esp. in [dialect] Ep., into κάγ, κάδ, κάκ, κάμ, κάν, κάπ, κάρ, κάτ, before γ, δ, κ, μ, ν, π (or φ) , ῥ, τ (or θ), respectively; see these forms in their own places. Mss. and the older Edd. join the Prep. with the following word, as καγγόνυ, καδδέ, κακκεφαλῆς, καππεδίον, καπφάλαρα, καρρόον, καττάδε, καττόν, etc. In compd. Verbs, κατά sts. changes into καβ, καλ, καρ, κατ, before β, λ, ρ, θ, respectively, as κάββαλε, κάλλιπε, καρρέζουσα, κάτθανε; and before στ, σχ, the second syll. sts. disappears, as in καστορνῦσα, κάσχεθε, as also in the [dialect] Dor. forms καβαίνων, κάπετον.

------------------------------------

κατά [(B)],

A = κατὰ τά, IG22.334.15; cf. κά. [full] κᾆτα, [dialect] Att. crasis for καὶ εἶτα, v. εἶτα sub fin. [full] κατάβα, for κατάβηθι, [tense] aor. 2 imper. of καταβαίνω.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > κατά
16 μεταβάλλω

μεταβάλλω, [tense] fut. -

A βᾰλῶ Ar.Av. 1568
: [tense] aor. μετέβᾰλον:—throw into a different position, turn quickly or suddenly, Hom.only once, in tmesi, μετὰ νῶτα βαλών Il.8.94
; χαλεπῶς μ. δέμας E.Hipp. 204
(anap.), cf. Gal.15.556; μ. θοἰμάτιον ἐπιδεξιά Ar.
l.c.; μ. γῆν turn, i.e. plough, the earth, X.Oec.16.14; μετέβαλε Κύριος ἄνεμον ἐκ θαλάσσης LXX Ex. 10.19
; μ. ποταμόν change the course of a river, Jul.Or.3.126d.

II turn about, change, alter, τὸ οὔνομα Hdt.1.57
; τὴν πολιτείαν Arist.Pol. 1292b21
; [οἱ Βρίγες] τὸ οὔνομα μετέβαλον [ἐς Φρύγας] Hdt.7.73; τὰς φυλὰς μετέβαλε [ὁ Κλεισθένης] ἐς ἄλλα οὐνόματα Id.5.68
; μ. μορφήν τινος εἰς ἀνδρὸς φύσιν E.Ba.54
; [τινὰ] ἐπὶ κακόν Ar.Th. 723
; ἐπὶ τὸ βέλτιον Pl.R. 381b
; μ. δίαιταν change one's way of life, Th.2.16; μ. ὕδατα drink different water, Hdt.8.117; ὀργὰς μ. E.Med. 121
(anap.); μ. τοὺς τρόπους Ar.Pl.36
, Eup.357.7; μ. τὸ ἔθος Th.1.123
; μ. εὔνοιαν lose it, ib. 77; μ. χώραν ἐκ χώρας Pl.Tht. 181c
: freq. with Adjs., etc., implying change, μ. ἄλλους τρόπους change and adopt other ways, E.IA 343 (troch.); μ. ἄλλας γραφάς ib. 363 (troch.); εἶδος καινὸν μουσικῆς μ. Pl. R. 424c
; πόλις ἄλλον ἐξ ἄλλου -βάλλουσα τύραννον Plu.Tim.1
; μ. ἀντὶ τοῦ ὁμο- ἀ-" Pl.Cra. 405d; ἐμαυτὸν ἄνω κάτω μετέβαλλον Id.Phd. 96b
; ἄνω καὶ κάτω τὰς δόξας μ. Id.R. 508d
: c. acc. cogn., πολλὰς μεταβολὰς.. μ. ὑδάτων καὶ σίτων ib. 404a.

b translate, νόμον εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα φωνήν J.AJProoem.3
, cf. 12.2.13 ([voice] Pass.).

c stir with a spoon, Dsc.3.22 ([voice] Pass.).

III intr., undergo a change, μ. ἐς εὐνομίην Hdt.1.65
, cf. Antipho 2.4.9; μ. εἰς ὀλιγαρχικὸν ἐκ τοῦ τιμοκρατικοῦ Pl.R. 553a
, etc.; μ. ἐπὶ τοὐναντίον Id.Plt. 270d
; ὅταν εἰς ἑτέραν -βάλῃ πολιτείαν ἡ πόλις Arist.Pol. 1276b14
, cf. 1301a20: impers., μεταβάλλει διὰ πλειόνων ζῴων changes run through a series of creatures, Thphr.HP2.4.4: c. gen. rei, come in exchange for or instead of, καιναὶ καινῶν μεταβάλλουσαι.. συντυχίαι E.Tr. 1118
.

b vary, μεταβάλλειν τὰς ἐπιστήμας τοῖς τόποις Phld.Rh.2.115
S.

2 change one's course, μεταβαλὼν πρὸς Ἀθηναίους turning to the Athenians, Hdt.8.109: [tense] aor. part. μεταβαλών abs., instead, in turn, μεταβαλόντας ἀντὶ Κρητῶν γενέσθαι Ἰήπυγας Id.7.170
, cf. E. Ion 1614, Pl.Smp. 204e, Grg. 480e: also [tense] pres. part. μεταβάλλων Id.Tht. 166d
.

B [voice] Med., turn round, shift a load, μεταβαλλόμενος τἀνάφορον Ar. Ra.8
; προβαλλομένους τὰ ὅπλα ἢ μεταβαλλομένους X.An.6.5.16
.

2 cause to be removed, σῖτον PHib.1.45.6
(iii B. C.), etc.

b order to be paid, remit, POxy.1153.8 (i A. D.), 1419.5 (iii A. D.).

II change what is one's own, μ. τὰ ἱμάτια change one's clothes, X.Mem.1.6.6; μ. τοὺς τρόπους Ar.V. 1461
(lyr.); μετεβάλλετ' ὀπωπάν changed her appearance, Erinn. in PSI9.1090.53 + 13 (p.xii).

2 exchange, τίς μεταβάλοιτ' ἂν ὧδε σιγὰν λόγων; silence for words, S.El. 1261; [τὴν ἄσαρκον τροφὴν] ὑγείας καὶ ῥώμης μεταβαλέσθαι have given up asceticism in exchange for health and strength, Porph.Abst.1.2; barter, traffic in, οἴνου μεταβαλλόμενος καὶ σίτου πρᾶσιν Pl.Lg. 849d
; μ. τὰ ἀλλότρια ἔργα Id.Sph. 223d
; μ. ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ X.Mem.3.7.6
, cf. D.S. 5.13.

III turn oneself, turn about, ἄνω καὶ κάτω Pl.Grg. 481e
, Din.1.17; esp.

2 change one's purpose or mind, Hdt.5.75, SIG 22.20 (v B. C.), Act.Ap.28.6, etc.; change sides, Th.1.71, 8.90, X.HG 2.3.31; πρός τινα Axionic.6.10
.

3 turn or wheel round, μ. ἐπ' ἀσπίδα X.Cyr.7.5.6
; τὸ δόρυ εἰς τοὔπισθεν μ. Id.Eq.8.10
: abs., turn about, μεταβαλλόμενος τοῖς ἔξω περιεστηκόσι λοιδορήσεται Aeschin. 3.207
.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > μεταβάλλω
17 παρά

πᾰρά [pron. full] [ρᾰ], [dialect] Ep. and Lyr. also [full] παραί: shortd. [full] πάρ, in Hom., Lyr. (but rarely in Trag., in lyr. passages, A.Supp. 553, S.Tr. 636), and in all dial ects exc. [dialect] Att., GDI5434.8 ([place name] Paros), IG5(2).3.14 (Tegea, iv B. C.), Inscr.Magn.26.28 (Thess.), etc.:—Prep. c. gen., dat., and acc., prop.

A beside: hence,

A WITH GEN. prop. denoting motion from the side of, from beside, from:

I of Place, πὰρ νηῶν ἔλθωμεν Il.13.744
; παρὰ ναῦφιν ἐλευσόμεθ' 12.225
, etc.; παρ' Ὠκεανοῖο ῥοάων.. ἐπερχομένη Od.22.197
; πὰρ νηῶν ἀπώσεται Il.8.533
, etc.; δῶρα π. νηὸς ἐνεικέμεν 19.194
; φάσγανον ὀξὺ ἐρυσσάμενος π. μηροῦ 1.190
, cf. 21.173; σπασσάμενος.. ἄορ παχέος π. μηροῦ 16.473
; πλευρὰ παρ' ἀσπίδος ἐξεφαάνθη was exposed beside the shield, 4.468, cf. A.Th. 624.

II commonly of Persons,

1 with Verbs of going or coming, bringing, etc., ἦλθε.. πὰρ Διός Il.2.787
; παρ' Αἰήταο πλέουσα Od.12.70
, etc.; ἀγγελίη ἥκει π. βασιλέος Hdt.8.140
. ά; αὐτομολήσαντες π. βασιλέως X.An.1.7.13
; ἐξεληλυθὼς παρ' Ἀριστάρχου D.21.117
; ὁ π. τινὸς ἥκων his messenger, X.Cyr.4.5.53; so οἱ π. τινός Th.7.10
, Ev.Marc.3.21, etc.; ὅστις ἀφικνεῖτο τῶν π. βασιλέως πρὸς αὐτόν X.An.1.1.5
, etc.; τεύχεα καλὰ φέρουσα παρ' Ἡφαίστοιο from his workshop, Il.18.137, cf. 617, etc.; ἀπαγγέλλειν τι π. τινός X.An.2.1.20
; σὺ δὲ οἰμώζειν αὐτοῖς παρ' ἐμοῦ λέγε Luc.DMort.1.2
.

2 issuing from a person, γίγνεσθαι π. τινός to be born from, Pl.Smp. 179b; λόγος (sc. ἐστί) π. Ἀθηναίων c. acc. et inf., Hdt.8.55: freq. following a Noun, δόξα ἡ π. τῶν ἀνθρώπων glory from (given by) men, Pl.Phdr. 232a; ἡ π. τινὸς εὔνοια the favour from, i. e. of, any one, X.Mem.2.2.12; τὸ παρ' ἐμοῦ ἀδίκημα done by me, Id.Cyr.5.5.13; τὰ π. τινός all that issues from any one, as commands, commissions, Id.An.2.3.4, etc.; or promises, gifts, presents, Id.Mem.3.11.13; τὰ παρ' ἐμοῦ my opinions, Pl.Smp. 219a; παρ' ἑωυτοῦ διδούς giving from oneself, i. e. from one's own means, Hdt. 2.129, 8.5; παρ' ἑαυτοῦ προσετίθει X.HG6.1.3
; νόμον θὲς παρ' ἐμοῦ by my advice, Pl.Prt. 322d; αὐτοὶ παρ' αὑτῶν of themselves, Id.Tht. 150d, cf. Phdr. 235c.

3 with Verbs of receiving, obtaining, and the like , τυχεῖν τινος π. τινός Od.6.290
, 15.158; πὰρ δ' ἄρα μιν Ταφίων πρίατο 14.452
; ἀρέομαι πὰρ μὲν Σαλαμῖνος Ἀθαναίων χάριν Pi.P.1.76
; εὑρέσθαι τι π. τῶν θεῶν Isoc.9.14
, cf. IG12.40.10; δέχεσθαι, λαμβάνειν, ἁρπάζειν π. τινός, Th.1.20, X.Oec.9.11, Hes.Th. 914; ἀντιάσαι, αἰτήσασθαι π. τινός, S.El. 870 (lyr.), X.HG3.1.4; ἀξιοῖ π. τοῦ ἰατροῦ φάρμακον πιὼν ἐξεμέσαι τὸ νόσημα Pl.R. 406d
; κόσμος τοῖς πράξασι γίγνεται π. τῶν ἀκουσάντων Id.Mx. 236e
: without Verb, ὁ καρπὸς ὁ π. τῶν δημάρχων IG12.76.27
: with Verbs of learning, etc., μεμαθηκέναι π. τινῶν Hdt.2.104
, etc.

4 with [voice] Pass. Verbs, πὰρ Διὸς.. μῆνις ἐτύχθη Il.15.122
; π. θεῶν ἡ τοιαύτη μανία δίδοται Pl.Phdr. 245c
, etc.; τὰ π. τῶν θεῶν σημαινόμενα, συμβουλευόμενα, X.Cyr.1.6.2; τὰ π. τινὸς λεγόμενα ib.6.1.42; τὰ π. τῆς τύχης δωρηθέντα the presents of.., Isoc.4.26; με π. σοῦ σοφίας πληρωθήσεσθαι Pl.Smp. 175e
.

III rarely for παρά c. dat., by, near, πὰρ ποδός Pi.P.10.62
, 3.60; παρὰ δὲ κυανέων πελαγέων dub. l. in S.Ant. 966 (lyr.); τὸν Ῥειτὸν τὸν παρὰ τοῦ ἄστεως IG12.81.5
; πολλοὶ παρ' ἀμφοτέρων ἔπιπτον, = ἀμφοτέρωθεν, D.S.19.42.

IV π. τῆς συγχωρήσεώς τινος without his consent, BCH46.337 ([place name] Teos).

B WITH DAT. denoting rest by the side of any person or thing, answering the question where?

I of Places, κατ' ἂρ ἕζετ'.. πὰρ πυρί, ἔκειτο π. σηκῷ, Od.7.154, 9.319; νέμονται π. πέτρῃ 13.408
; ἑσταότες παρ ὄχεσφιν Il.8.565
; πὰρ ποσὶ μαρναμένων ἐκυλίνδετο at their feet, 14.411, etc.; π. θύρῃσι at the door, 7.346; π. ῥηγμῖνι θαλάσσης 2.773
; δεῖπνον.. εἵλοντο παρ' ὄχθῃσιν ποταμοῖο Od.6.97
, cf. Il.4.475, 20.53, etc.; κεῖσθαι παρ' Ἅιδῃ S.OT 972
; παρ' οἴνῳ over wine, ib. 780, etc.

II of persons, beside, πὰρ δὲ οἷ αὐτῷ εἷσε Θεοκλύμενον Od.15.285
; κεῖτο παρὰ μνηστῇ ἀλόχῳ Il.9.556
, cf. 6.246, etc.; παρ' ἀνδράσιν εὐνάζεσθαι Od.5.119
; δαίνυσθαι π. τινί 8.243
; πὰρ δέ οἱ ἑστήκει stood by him, Il.4.367.

2 at one's house or place, with one, μένειν π. τισί 9.427
; θητευέμεν ἄλλῳ, ἀνδρὶ παρ' ἀκλήρῳ Od.11.490
; φιλέεσθαι π. τινί Il.13.627
; παρ' ἑωυτοῖσι at their own house, Hdt.1.105, cf. 86; παιδευθῆναι π. τινί X.Cyr.1.2.15
; καταλύειν π. τινί D.18.82
(but παρά τινα καταλῦσαι Th.1.136
), etc.: hence οἱ παρ' ἐμοί those of my household, X.Mem.2.7.4, etc.; τὰ παρ' ἐμοί life with me, Id.An. 1.7.4; οἱ παρ' ἡμῖν ἄνθρωποι our people, Pl.Phd. 64b; ἡ παρ' ἡμῖν πολιτεία, ὁ παρ' ὑμῖν δῆμος, D.15.19; ὁ παρ' αὑτῷ βίοτος one's own life, S.OT 612; τὸ παρ' ἡμῖν πῦρ Pl.Phlb. 29f
; ὅσος παρ' ὑμῖν ὁ φθόνος φυλάσσεται S.OT 382
; τὸ παρ' ἡμῖν σῶμα Pl.Phlb. 29f
; also, in one's hands, τὰ π. τοῖς Ἑλληνοταμίαις ὄντα IG12.91.6
; ἔχειν παρ' ἑωυτῷ Hdt. 1.130
, etc.; οὔπω παρ' ἐμοὶ τότ' ἦν λέγειν I had no right to speak then, Men.Epit.98.

3 before, in the presence of, ἤειδε π. μνηστῆρσιν Od. 1.154
; before a judge, δίκας γίγνεσθαι π. τῷ πολεμάρχῳ IG12.16.9
; π. Δαρείῳ κριτῇ Hdt.3.160
; π. τῷ βασιλέϊ Id.4.65
; παρὰ δικασταῖς Th. 1.73
; εἰς κρίσιν καθιστάναι τινὰ π. τισί D.18.13
: hence παρ' ἐμοί in my judgement, Hdt.1.32, cf. S.Tr. 589, E.Heracl. 881, 1 Ep.Cor.3.19; π. τούτῳ μέγα δυνήσεται with him, Pl.Grg. 510e.

4 in quoting authors, παρ' Ἐφόρῳ, παρ' Αἰσχίνῃ, π. Θουκυδίδῃ, in Ephorus, etc., Plb. 9.2.4, D.H.Comp.9,18.

III Arc., = π. c. gen., from, καθὰ εἶχον τὰς ἰντολὰς π. τᾷ ἰδίᾳ πόλι SIG559.9
(Megalop., iii B. C.), cf. 558.10 (Ithaca, iii B. C.).

C WITH ACCUS. in three main senses,

I beside, near, by,

II along,

III past, beyond.

I beside, near, by:

1 with Verbs of coming, going, etc., to the side of, to, ἴτην π. νῆας Il.1.347
, cf. 8.220, etc.; βῆ.. π. θῖνα 1.34
, cf. 327, etc.; τρέψας πὰρ ποταμόν to the side of.., 21.603, cf. 3.187: more freq. of persons, εἶμι παρ' Ἥφαιστον to the chamber of H., 18.143, cf. Od.1.285, etc.; ἐσιόντες π. τοὺς φίλους Th.2.51
, etc.; φοιτᾶν π. τὸν Σωκράτη Pl.Phd. 59d
; πέμπειν ἀγγέλους, πρέσβεις π. τινά, Hdt. 1.141, Th.1.58, etc.; ἄγειν π. τινά Hdt.1.86
; καταφυγὴ π. φίλων τινάς Th.2.17
.

2 with Verbs of rest, beside, near, by, sts. with ref. to past motion (expressed in such phrases as ἧσο παρ' αὐτὸν ἰοῦσα Il.3.406
, cf. 11.577), ἔς ῥα θρόνους ἕζοντο παρ' Ἀτρεΐδην Μενέλαον Od.4.51
, cf. 13.372; κεῖται ποταμοῖο παρ' ὄχθας lies stretched beside.., Il.4.487, cf. 12.381; παρ' ἔμ' ἵστασο come and stand by me, 11.314, cf. 592, 20.49, etc.; π. πυθμέν' ἐλαίης θῆκαν Od.13.122
; καταθέτω π. τὰ ἴκρια IG12.94.28
; κοιμήσαντο π. πρυμνήσια they lay down by.., Od.12.32, cf. 3.460; ὁ παρ' ἐμὲ καθήμενος Pl.Euthd. 271b
, cf. Phd. 89b; ἐκάθητο π. τὴν πύλην, π. τὴν ὁδόν, LXX Ge.19.1, Ev.Marc. 10.46; παρ' αὐτὸν τὸν καλέσαντα κατακείμενος δειπνῆσαι Thphr.Char. 21.2
, cf. Pl.Smp. 175c; ἐκαθέζετο π. τὸν Λύσιν Id.Ly. 211a
, cf. R. 328c; στὰς παρ' αὐτόν Id.Phd. 116c
; τέμενος νεμόμεσθα.. παρ' ὄχθας Il.12.313
, cf. 6.34, IG12.943.45; τοῦ Εὐρίπου, παρ' ὃν ᾤκει Aeschin.3.90
; κατελείφθη π. τὸν νηόν Hdt.4.87
; τὴν παρ' ἐμὲ ἐοῦσαν δύναμιν Id.8.140
.ά (v.l. ἐμοί) ; εἶπεν αὐτῷ μένειν παρ' ἑαυτόν X.Cyr.1.4.18
, cf. An.1.9.31, Ar.Fr. 451, Is.8.16, Alex.248, Demetr.Com. Nov.1.5, IG22.654.23 (iii B. C.), Plb.3.26.1, 11.14.3, 28.14.3; ἡ π. θάλασσαν Μακεδονία Th.2.99
, cf. S.El. 184 (lyr.), Tr. 636 (lyr.); Καρβασυανδῆς π. Καῦνον IG12.204.52
; τὸ κουρεῖον τὸ π. τοὺς Ἑρμᾶς Lys.23.3
, cf. And.1.62, Is.6.20, 8.35, Aeschin. 1.182, 3.88, Lycurg.112; τᾶς παστάδος τᾶς παρ' Ἀπόλλωνα IG42
(1).109 iii 146 (Epid.); παρ' ὄμμα before one's eyes, E.Supp. 484; π. πόδας on the spot, Phld.Ir.p.78 W., Rh.2.2 S.; immediately thereafter, Plb.1.7.5, 1.8.2, al.

b [dialect] Dor., [dialect] Boeot., and Thess., = supr. B. 11.2, at the house of.., with a person, IG7.3171.7 (Orchom. [dialect] Boeot.), GDI 1717 (Delph.); παρ' ἁμὲ πολυτίματος [ὁ σῖτος] Ar.Ach. 759 (Megar.); τοῖς κατοικέντεσσι πὰρ ἀμμέ IG9(2).517.18
(Larissa, iii B. C.); τοῖ πὰρ ἀμμὲ πολιτεύματος ib.13; πεπολιτευκὼρ πὰρ ἁμέ Schwyzer 425.5
(Elis, iii/ii B. C.): so in [dialect] Att., θέμενος π. γυναῖκας depositing with.., Pl. R. 465c.

3 with Verbs of striking, wounding, etc., βάλε στῆθος π. μαζόν Il.4.480
, etc.; τὸν δ' ἕτερον.. κληῗδα παρ' ὦμον πλῆξε 5.146
; τύψε κατὰ κληῗδα παρ' αὐχένα 21.117
, cf. 4.525, 8.325, etc.; αἰχμὴ δ' ἐξελύθη παρὰ νείατον ἀνθερεῶνα 5.293
, cf. 17.310; δησάμενος τελαμῶνι π. σφυρόν ib. 290.

4 with Verbs of placing, examining, etc., side by side with.., ὁ ἔλεγχος π. τὸν ἔλεγχον παραβαλλόμενος Pl.Grg. 475e
, cf. Hp.Mi. 369c, Smp. 214c, R. 348a; ἐξέτασον παρ' ἄλληλα τὰ σοὶ κἀμοὶ βεβιωμένα D.18.265
; ἄλλα παρ' ἄλλατιθέμενα.. τῶν χρωμάτων Arist.Mete. 375a24
.

b Geom., παραβάλλειν π. apply an area to (i. e. along) a finite straight line, Euc.1.44, Archim.Aequil.2.1; π. τὴν δοθεῖσαν αὐτοῦ γραμμὴν παρατείναντα Pl. Men. 87a
; ἡ [εὐθεῖα] παρ' ἣν δύνανται αἱ καταγόμεναι τεταγμένως the line to which are applied the squares of the or dinates, etc., Apollon. Perg.Con.1.11: hence,

c Arith., παραβάλλειν τι π. τι divide by.. (v. παραβάλλω A.
VII. 2); μερίζω τι π. τι Dioph.4.33
; ἐπὶ γ π. ί multiply by 3 and divide by 10, PLond.5.1718.2 (vi A. D.).

5 Geom., parallel to.., Democr.155, Arist. Top. 158b31, Archim.Sph. Cyl.1.12, al.

6 metaph. in Gramm., like, as a parody of.., π. τὸ Σοφόκλειον, π. τὰ ἐν Τεύκρῳ Σοφοκλέους, Sch.Ar.Av. 1240, Nu. 584.

b Gramm., of words which differ as compared with other words, π. τὸ τοῦ ἔρωτος ὄνομα σμικρὸν παρηγμένον ἐστίν.. [τὸ ἥρως] Pl.Cra. 398d, cf. 399a, Lg. 654a: hence, derived from.., π. τὸ ἔδαφος, δάπεδον, A.D. Pron.31.16; π. τὸ δρῶ δρᾶμα Sch.A.R.2.624; σύγκειται [τὸ αὐθέντης] π. τὸ εἷναι.. καὶ π. τὸ αὐτός Phryn.PSp.24
B.

7 generally, of Comparison, alongside of, compared with, usu. implying superiority, δοκέοντες π. ταῦτα οὐδ' ἂν τοὺς σοφωτάτους ἀνθρώπων Αἰγυπτίους οὐδὲν ἐπεξευρεῖν Hdt.2.160
, cf. 7.20, 103; ἡλίου ἐκλείψεις αἳ πυκνότεραι π. τὰ ἐκ τοῦ πρὶν χρόνου μνημονευόμενα ξυνέβησαν Th.1.23
, cf. 4.6; τῶν ἁπάντων ἀπερίοπτοί εἰσι π. τὸ νικᾶν Id.1.41
; π. τὰ ἄλλα ζῷα ὥσπερ θεοὶ ἄνθρωποι βιοτεύουσι X.Mem.1.4.14
; φαίνεται π. τὸ ἀλγεινὸν ἡδὺ καὶ π. τὸ ἡδὺ ἀλγεινὸν ἡ ἡσυχία Pl.R. 584a
, cf. Phdr. 236d, La. 183c, al.; εὐδαίμων μᾶλλον π. πάντας BCH26.332
([place name] Halae); προετέρει π. πάντας PSI 4.422.34
(iii B. C.): sts. implying inferiority or defect, ἠλάττωσας αὐτὸν βραχύ τι παρ' ἀγγέλους a little lower than the angels, LXX Ps. 8.6; μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ ὑστεροῦσι π. τὸν ἥλιον lag one day behind the sun, Gem.8.19; so perh. παρ' αὐτόν, ὑπὲρ αὐτόν (has passed the ball?) short of him, beyond him, Antiph.234; μέγα τοι ἡμέρα παρ' ἡμέραν γιγνομένη γνώμην ἐξ ὀργῆς μεταστῆσαι one day compared with another is important.., a day's delay makes a difference, Antipho 5.72; τί γὰρ παρ' ἦμαρ ἡμέρα τέρπειν ἔχει προσθεῖσα κἀναθεῖσα τοῦ γε κατθανεῖν; what joy has one day compared with another to offer, since it only brings us nearer to, or farther from, death (which is neither good nor evil)? S.Aj. 475; ὃς μὲν κρίνει (prefers) ἡμέραν παρ' ἡμέραν, ὃς δὲ κρίνει (approves) πᾶσαν ἡμέραν Ep.Rom.14.5
.

8 with Verbs of estimating, to set at so and so much, hence π. = equivalent to.., ταρβῶ μὴ.. θῆται παρ' οὐδὲν τὰς ἐμὰς ἐπιστολάς set at nought, E.IT 732, cf. A. Ag. 229 (lyr.); παρ' οὐδὲν ἄγειν S.Ant.35
; π. μικρὸν ἡγεῖσθαι or ποιεῖσθαί τι hold of small account, Isoc.5.79, D.61.51; παρ' ὀλίγον ποιεῖσθαί τινα X.An.6.6.11
; so with εἶναι, etc., παρ' οὐδέν ἐστι are as nothing, S.OT 983, cf. Ant. 466; παρ' οὐδὲν αὐταῖς ἦν ἂν ὀλλύναι πόσεις E.Or. 569
; οὐ π. μέγα ἔσεσθαι τὸ πταῖσμα Arr.An.1.18.6
; so perh. π. σμικρὰ κεχώρηκε have turned out of little account, have amounted to little, Hdt.1.120.

b in Accountancy, without a verb, π. τὴν καταλλαγήν on account of κ., PHib.1.100.4 (iii B. C.).

9 of correspondence, ὀφείλειν στατῆρα π. στατῆρα stater for stater (one to each of two creditors), BCH50.214 (Thasos, v B. C.); πληγὴν π. πληγὴν ἑκάτερον Ar.Ra. 643
; συνεῖναι ἑκατέρῳ ἡμέραν παρ' ἡμέραν stayed day for day with each, D.59.46; hence of alternation, ποιεῖσθαι ἁγνείας καὶ θυσίας δύο π. δύο, of four priests acting two and two alternately, BGU1198.12 (i B. C.); τοῦ καθημερινοῦ ἢ μίαν π. μίαν (sc. ἡμέραν) [πυρετοῦ] quotidian or tertian fever, ib.956.3 (iii A. D.): sts. without doubling of the Noun, παρ' ἡμέρην, opp. καθ' ἡμέρην, tertian, opp. quotidian, Hp.Aph.1.12; καθ' ἡμέραν, παρ' ἡμέραν, π. δύο, π. τρεῖς every day, every second day, every third (fourth) day, Arr.Epict.2.18.13; π. μίαν every second day, Plb.3.110.4; παρ' ἐνιαυτόν every second year, Plu.Cleom.15; παρ' ἔτος year and year about, Arist.GA 757a7; every second year, Paus.8.15.2; π. μέρος by turns (v. μέρος II. 2); ὁ ἀνὰ μέρος παρ' ἓξ μῆνας ὑπὲρ γῆν τε καὶ ὑπὸ γῆν γινόμενος Ἄδωνις Corn. ND28
; π. μῆνα τρίτον every third month, Arist.HA 582b4, cf. Plu.2.942e; but π. τρία [ἔτεα] prob. every fourth year, IG5(2).422 ([place name] Phigalea), cf. Arr.Epict. l.c.; ἕνα παρ' ἕνα παραλειπτέον every second one, Nicom.Ar.1.18; ἕνα π. δύο ([etym.] τρεῖς) every third (fourth) one, ibid.; παρὰ δ' ἄλλαν ἄλλα μοῖρα διώκει now one now another, E.Heracl. 611.

10 precisely at the moment of, παρ' αὐτὰ τἀδικήματα flagrante delicto, D.18.13, 21.26; ἀποδώσω π. τὸν εὔθυνον τὸ καθῆκον IG12.188.31
; π. τοιοῦτον καιρόν, π. τὰς χρείας, D.20.41,46; π. τὰ δεινά in the midst of danger, Plu.Ant.63; π. τὴν πρώτην γένεσιν Jul.Or.1.10b
; π. τὴν πρώτην (sc. ἐπίθεσιν) at the first attack, Hld.9.2; π. γε τὴν πρώτην ὁρμήν Ael.NA14.10
.

b distributively, whether of Time, π. τὰ ἑβδομήκοντα ἔτεα in each complete period of seventy years, Hdt.1.32; ἐν ταῖς ὁδοιπορίαις π. στάδια διακόσια.. τοῖς ἑκατὸν σταδίοις διήνεγκαν ἀλλήλων X.Oec.20.18
; πὰρ Ϝέτος each year, every year, Tab.Heracl. 1.101; π. τὸν ἐνιαυτὸν ἕκαστον IG12(7).5.14
([place name] Amorgos); παρ' ἆμάρ τε καὶ νύκτα day and night, B.Fr.7; or more generally, πὰρ τὰν ἐλαίαν in respect of each olive plant, Tab.Heracl.1.122; παρ' ἡμέραν αἱ ἀμίαι πολὺ ἐπιδήλως αὐξάνονται from day to day, per day, Arist.HA 571a21; τὸ παρ' ἑκάστην βάσιν γινόμενον μικρὸν πολὺ γίνεται π. πολλάς Id.Pr. 881b26
; ἡ παρ' ἡμέραν χάρις D.8.70
; τὸ παρ' ἑκάστην ἡμέραν ἡδύ Pl. Lg. 705a
.

c παρ' ἆμαρ on (this) day, to-day, τὸ μὲν πὰρ ἆμαρ, τὸ δέ .. to-day and to-morrow, Pi.P.11.63; but παρ' ἦμαρ to-morrow, S. OC 1455 (lyr.).

d throughout a period of time, π. τὴν ζόην Hdt. 7.46
; π. τὸν βίον ἅπαντα Pl.Lg. 733a
; π. πάντα τὸν χρόνον D.18.10
; also more loosely, during, π. τὴν πόσιν while they were drinking, Hdt.2.121.
δ; π. τὸν πότον Aeschin.2.156
; π. τὴν κύλικα Plu.Ant.24
; π. δεῖπνον or π. τὸ δεῖπνον, Id.2.737a,674f.

II along, ὄνος παρ' ἄρουραν ἰών Il.11.558
; βῆ δὲ θέειν π. τεῖχος 12.352
; π. ῥόον Ὠκεανοῖο ᾔομεν Od. 11.21
; ἔπλεον π. τὴν ἤπειρον Hdt.7.193
; π. πᾶσαν τὴν ὁδόν Isoc.4.148
; ὀρθὴν παρ' οἶμον.. τύμβον κατόψει straight along the road, E.Alc. 835; παρ' ὅλην τὴν φάραγγα Plb.10.30.3
; παρ' αὐτὴν τὴν χαράδραν παραπορευομένων ib.9; for παραβάλλειν π., v. supr. c. 1.4b.

2 strictly according to, without deviating from, εἶμι π. στάθμην ὀρθὴν ὁδόν Thgn. 945
, cf. S.Fr.474.5; ὠμοί τε δούλοις πάντα καὶ π. στάθμην, i.e. too strict, A.Ag. 1045; π. τὸν λόγον ὃν ἀποφέρουσιν.. ἐπιδείξω I will prove to you strictly according to the accounts which they themselves submit, D.27.34.

III past, beyond, παρὰ σκοπιὴν καὶ ἐρινεὸν ἠνεμόεντα.. ἐσσεύοντο Il.22.145
, cf. Od.3.172, 24.12; βῆ δὲ π. Κρουνούς h.Ap. 425
; π. τὴν Βαβυλῶνα παριέναι pass by Babylon, X.Cyr.5.2.29; παρ' αὐτὴν τὴν χύτραν ἄκραν ὁρῶντες looking over the edge of.., Ar.Av. 390.

2 metaph., over and above, in addition to, οὐκ ἔστι π. ταῦτ' ἄλλα Id.Nu. 698
; π. ταῦτα πάντα ἕτερόν τι Pl.Phd. 74a
, cf.R. 337d, D.18.139, X.HG 1.5.5; ἑκὼν ἐπόνει π. τοὺς ἄλλους more than the others, Id.Ages.5.3, cf. Mem.4.4.1, Oec.20.16; ἃ τῷ ῥαψῳδῷ προσήκει καὶ σκοπεῖσθαι καὶ διακρίνειν π. τοὺς ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους Pl. Ion 539e
.

3 metaph., in excess over, πὰρ δύναμιν beyond one's strength, Il.13.787, cf. Th.1.70, Hyp.Lyc.16, Arist.Rh.Al. 1423b29; π. τὴν δ. Id.Po. 1451b38
.

4 metaph., in transgression or violation of, π. μοῖραν Od.14.509
; π. μοῖραν Δίος Alc.Supp. 14.10
; παρ' αἶσαν, παρὰ δίκαν, Pi.P.8.13, O.2.16, etc.; π. τὸ δίκαιον Th.5.90
, etc.; π. τὰς σπονδάς, τὸν νόμον, Id.1.67, X.HG1.7.14; π. φύσιν Th.6.17
, cf. Pl.Lg. 747b; π. τὴν στήλην prob. in IG12.45.20; π. καιρόν out of season, Pi.O.8.24, etc.; π. γνώμαν ib.12.10, cf. A.Supp. 454; π. δόξαν, π. τὸ δοκοῦν ἡμῖν, π. λόγον, Th.3.93, 1.84, Plb.2.38.5; παρ' ἐλπίδα or ἐλπίδας, A.Ag. 899, S.Ant. 392, etc.; πὰρ μέλος out of tune, Pi.N.7.69; π. τὴν ἀξίαν Th.7.77
, etc.; π. τὸ εἰωθός, τὸ καθεστηκός, Id.4.17, 1.98.

5 π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε κινδύνου, = παρῆλθε τοσοῦτον κινδύνου, passed over so much ground within the sphere of danger, i.e. incurred such imminent peril, Id.3.49, cf. 7.2; in such phrases the tmesis was forgotten, and the acc. came to be governed by παρά, which thus came to mean 'by such and such a margin', ' with so much to spare', ἐνίκησαν π. πολύ, ἡσσηθέντες π. πολύ, Id.1.29, 2.89, cf. Pl. Ap. 36a; παρὰ δ' ὀλίγον ἀπέφυγες only just, E.IT 870 (lyr.); παρ' ὀλίγον ἢ διέφευγον ἢ ἀπώλλυντο Th.7.71
; δεινότατον π. πολύ by far, Ar.Pl. 445; παρ' ὅσον quatenus, Luc.Nec.17, etc.; π. δύο ψήφους ἀπέφυγε by two votes, Hyp.Eux.28, cf. D.23.205; π. τέτταρας ψήφους μετέσχε τῆς πόλεως Is.3.37
; π. τοσοῦτον ἐγένετο αὐτῷ μὴ περιπεσεῖν by so much (= little) he missed falling in with.., Th.8.33; π. πέντε ναῦς πλέον ἀνδρὶ ἑκάστῳ ἢ τρεῖς ὀβολοὶ ὡμολογήθησαν ib.29; οὐ π. μικρὸν ἐποίησαν they made no little difference, Isoc.4.59.

b in phrases like π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε κινδύνου, τοσοῦτον was sts. understood of the interval from danger, etc., and παρά came to mean 'by so much short of' (τὸ π. μικρὸν ὥσπερ οὐδὲν ἀπέχειν δοκεῖ Arist.Ph. 197a29
), within such and such a distance of, so near to, τὴν Ἠϊόνα π. νύκτα ἐγένετο (sc. αὐτῷ) λαβεῖν he was within one night of taking E., Th.4.106; π. μικρὸν ἦλθον ἀποθανεῖν I came within a little of.., Isoc. 19.22, cf. Plb.1.43.7, Plu. Caes. 39; παρ' ἐλάχιστον ἦλθε.. ἀφελέσθαι was within an ace of taking away, Th.8.76; παρ' οὐδὲν μὲν ἦλθον ἀποκτεῖναι (were within a mere nothing, within an ace of killing him), ἐξεκήρυξαν δ' ἐκ πόλεως Aeschin. 3.258
, cf. Plu.Pyrrh. 14, Alex.62; π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε διαφυγεῖν so near he came to escaping, Luc.Cat.4; παρὰ ἓν πάλαισμα ἔδραμε νικᾶν Ὀλυμπιάδα Hdt.9.33
; παρ' οὐδὲν ἐλθόντες τοῦ ἀποβαλεῖν Plb.1.45.14
, cf. 2.55.4, D.S.17.42: hence without ἐγένετο or ἐλθεῖν, π. μίαν μονάδα (less) by one, i.e. less one, Nicom.Ar.1.8; τεσσαράκοντα π. μίαν, = 39, 2 Ep.Cor.11.24; παρ' ἕνα τοσοῦτοι the same number less one, Plu. Publ.9; σύ μοι παρ' ἕνα ἥκεις ἄγων you have brought me one too few, Luc.Cat.4; δύναται π. δύο συλλαβὰς εἶναι τὸ καταληκτόν Heph.4.2
; τὰ ὁλοκόττινα ηὑρέθησαν π. ἑπτὰ κεράτια seven carats short, PMasp.70.2 (vi A. D.); πάντες παρ' ἕνα, πάντες παρ' ὀλίγους, all save one (a few), Plu.Cat.Mi.20, Ant.5; ἔτη δύο π. ἡμέρας δύο IG5(1).801
([place name] Laconia); of one Μάρκος, θηρίον εἶ π. γράμμα you are a bear ([etym.] ἄρκος) all but a letter, AP11.231 (Ammian.); ὡς π. τι καὶ τὰς ὄψεις ἀφανίσαι so that he all but (lit. less something) lost his sight, Vett.Val.228.6; π. τι βυθίζεσθαι v.l. in Ev.Luc.5.7; τὸ π. τοῦτο the figure less that, i.e. the remainder or difference, PTeb.99.10 (ii B. C.), cf. POxy.264.4 (i A. D.), PAmh.2.148.5 (v A. D.); hence of any difference whether of excess or defect, οὐδὲν π. τοῦτο ποιούμενοι τοὺς.. Λευκανούς τε καὶ τοὺς.. Σαυνίτας making no difference between.., Str.6.1.3, cf. 14.5.11, Plu.2.24c.

6 hence of the margin by which anything increases or decreases, and so of the cause according to which anything comes into existence or varies, τὸ εὖ π. μικρὸν διὰ πολλῶν ἀριθμῶν γίνεται Polyclit.2
(cf. μικρός III. 5 c); διαφέρει π. τὰς τῶν παθημάτων ἐναντιώσεις according to.., Arist.HA 486b5; μεταπίπτει π. τὰ κλίματα Gem. 5.29
, cf. 11.5, al.; π. τὰ πράγματα cj. in Apollod.Car.11.

7 more generally of the margin by which an event occurs, i.e. of the necessary and sufficient cause or motive (τὸ μὴ π. τοῦτο γίνεσθαι τότε λέγομεν, ὅταν ἀναιρεθέντος τούτου μηδὲν ἧττον περαίνηται ὁ συλλογισμός Arist.APr. 65b6
, cf. 48a24, al.), κεινὰν π. δίαιταν just for the sake of unsatisfying food, Pi.O.2.65; ἕκαστος οὐ π. τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀμέλειαν οἴεται βλάψειν each thinks that his own negligence will not suffice to cause injury, Th.1.141, cf. Isoc.3.48; π. τὴν αὑτοῦ ἁμαρτίαν all through his own fault, Antipho 3.4.5, cf. Isoc.6.52, D.4.11, 18.232; πολλὰ.. ἐστιν αἴτια τούτων, καὶ οὐ παρ' ἓν οὐδὲ δύ' εἰς τοῦτο τὰ πράγματ' ἀφῖκται not from one or two causes only, Id.9.2; οὐ π. τοῦτο οὐκ ἔστι it does not follow that it is not.., 1 Ep.Cor.12.15; π. τὸ τὴν ἀρίθμησιν ποιήσασθαι ἐξ ἑτοίμου τοὺς ἐργώνας οὐκ ὀλίγα χρήματα περιεποίησε τῇ πόλει by the simple fact of prompt payment, IPE12.32B35 (Olbia, iii B. C.); οὐδὲν ἂν παρ' ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο τούτων Lycurg.63
, cf. Plb.3.103.2, 18.28.6, al.; οὐδεὶς παρ' ἑαυτόν ἐστι βασιλεύς thanks to himself alone, Aristeas 224; παρ' αὑτὸν ἀτυχεῖ Arr.Epict.3.24.2
, cf. Phld.Rh.2.16 S.; παρ' ἡμᾶς ἡ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἀπόστασις Hierocl. in CA25p.477M.
; εἶναι π. τοῦτο σωτηρίαν τε πόλει καὶ τοὐναντίον, i.e. on this depends.., Pl.Lg. 715d, cf. X.Eq.Mag.1.5, D.C.Fr.36.5; π. μίαν ἡμέραν καὶ ἓν πρᾶγμα καὶ ἀπόλλυται προκοπὴ καὶ σῴζεται Epict.Ench.51.2
; π. τὸ Ἕλληνά με εἶναι just because I am a Greek, UPZ7.13 (ii B. C.); π. τὸ ἀγαπᾶν αὐτὸν αὐτήν LXX Ge.29.20
, cf. Ex.14.11; later more loosely, because of.., Phld.Rh.1.158 S., Gem.6.24, etc.; οὐδὲν π. σὲ γέγονε it is no fault of yours, PRyl.243.6 (ii A. D.), cf. POxy.1420.7 (ii A. D.).

8 of a limit of possibility, εἴπερ ἐνεδέχετο π. τοὺς παρόντας καιρούς D.18.239
; πεῖσαι τό γε παρ' αὑτόν to persuade (the judges) so far as in you lies, Arr.Epict.2.2.20; οἴμωζε παρ' ἐμέ as far as I am concerned, for all I care, Ar.Av. 846.

D POSITION: παρά may follow its Subst. in all three cases, but then becomes by anastrophe πάρα: when the ult. is elided, the practice varies, τῇσι παρ' Il.18.400
; but Ἡφαίστοιο πάρ' ib. 191.

E παρά abs., as ADV., near, together, Il.1.611, al., E.IA 201 (lyr.).

F πάρα (with anastrophe) stands for πάρεστι and πάρεισι, Il.1.174, Hes.Op. 454, A.Pers. 167, Hdt.1.42, al., S.El. 285, Ar.Ach. 862, etc.

G IN COMPOS.,

I alongside of, beside, of rest, παράκειμαι, παράλληλοι, παρέζομαι, πάρειμι (εἰμί), παρίστημι; of motion, παραπλέω, πάρειμι ([etym.] εἶμι).

II to the side of, to, παραδίδωμι, παρέχω.

III to one side of, by, past, παρέρχομαι, παροίχομαι, παραπέμπω, παρακμάζω, παρατρέχω.

IV metaph.,

1 aside or beyond, i.e. amiss, wrong, παραβαίνω, παράγω, παροράω, παρορκέω, παρακούω, παραγιγνώσκω.

2 of comparison, as in παραβάλλω, παρατίθημι.

3 of alteration or change, as in παραλλάσσω, παραπείθω, παραπλάσσω, παρατεκταίνω, παραυδάω, παράφημι.

4 of a side-issue, παραπόλλυμι. (Cogn. with Goth. faúr 'along', Lat. por-.)

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > παρά
18 σύν

σύν [pron. full] [ῠ], old [dialect] Att. [full] ξύν; [dialect] Boeot. [full] σούν IG7.3171.39 (Orchom. [dialect] Boeot., iii B.C.): Prep. with dat. (rarely c. gen., σ. τῶν ἐν αὺτῷ νεκρῶν Mitteis Chr.129.23 (ii B.C.);

A σ. ἡρώων IPE2.383
([place name] Phanagoria); σ. γυναικός ib.301 ([place name] Panticapaeum), cf. Ostr.240.5 (ii A.D.), PLond.1.113 iv 19 (vi A.D.)):—with. The form ξύν rarely occurs in Hom., though it is not rare in compds. even when not required by the metre, as in ξυνέαξα, ξυνοχῇσιν, ξύμβλητο, ξύμπαντα; Hes. also uses ξύμπας, ξυνιέναι; in [dialect] Ion. verse we find ξύν Thgn.1063
(but σύν Id.50
), Sol. 19.3 (perh. old Attic), but σύν Archil.4
, cf. ξυνωνίη, συνίημι; in early [dialect] Ion. Prose (including Inscrr., cf. SIG1.2 (Abu Simbel, vi B.C.), 167.37 (Mylasa, iv B.C.), etc.) ξύν is only found in ξυνίημι Heraclit.51
, Democr.95 (cf. ἀξύνετος, ἀξυνεσίη, ξύνεσις), and in the phrase ξὺν νῷ ( νόῳ codd.) Heraclit.114, Democr.35; Hdt. has only σύν, and in codd. Hp. ξύν has weaker authority than σύν (i p.cxxv Kuehlewein); in the late Ionic of Aret., ξύν prevails over σύν; in [dialect] Aeol. and [dialect] Dor. it is rare, ξυνοίκην Sapph.75
; ξυναλίαξε Ar.Lys.93
; elsewh. [dialect] Dor. σύν, Leg.Gort. 5.6, IG9(1).334.47 ([dialect] Locr., v B.C.), etc.; but in old [dialect] Att. Inscrr. ξύν is the only form up to 500 B.C.; σύν appears in v B.C. and becomes usual towards the end; after 378 B.C. ξύν survives only in the formula γνώμην δὲ ξυμβάλλεσθαι κτλ.; the phrase ξὺν νῷ is found in Ar.Nu. 580, Pl.Cri. 48c, Men. 88b, R. 619b ( σὺν E.Or. 909
); otherwise, of [dialect] Att. Prose writers Th. alone uses the preposition ξύν, Antipho and Lysias have ξυν- a few times in compds.; codd. Pl. have both ξυν- (Lg. 930a, al.) and συν-; in Antipho Soph.Oxy.1364, Aristox., Arr., Ael., and Anon.Rhythm. ξυν- is very freq.; in Trag. both forms occur. The Prep. σύν gradually gave way to μετά with gen., so that whereas A. has 67 examples of σύν to 8 of μετά with gen., the proportions in Th. are 400 of μετά to 37 of σύν, in D. 346 of μετά to 15 of σύν, and in Arist. 300 of μετά to 8 of σύν: for these and other statistics see C. J. T. Mommsen, Beiträge zur Lehre von den griechischen Präpositionen (Frankfurt 1886-95): in [dialect] Att. Prose and Com. σύν is restricted for the most part to signf. 8, 9 and a few phrases, such as σὺν θεῷ, σὺν (τοῖς) ὅπλοις; Xenophon uses it freely, having 556 examples to 275 of μετά; in Pap., NT, and later Prose its use is much less restricted (v. infr.).

1 in company with, together with, δεῦρό ποτ' ἤλυθε.. σ. Μενελάῳ Il.3.206
; ξ. παιδὶ.. πύργῳ ἐφεστήκει 6.372
; σ. τοῖσδε ὑπέκφυγον Od.9.286
; καταφθίσθαι σ. ἐκείνῳ 2.183
; ἀπελαύνειν σ. τῷ στρατῷ Hdt.8.101
; ἐπαιδεύετο σ. τῷ ἀδελφῷ X.An.1.9.2
; σ. αὐτῷ σταυροῦσι δύο λῃστάς Ev.Marc.15.27
; οὐδένα ἔχω σ. ἐμοί PSI10.1161.12
(iv A.D.).

2 with collat. notion of help or aid, σ. θεῷ with God's help or blessing, as God wills, Il.9.49; σ. σοί, πότνα θεά Od.13.391
; πέμψον δέ με σ. γε θεοῖσιν Il.24.430
, cf. 15.26; σ. θεῷ φυτευθεὶς ὄλβος Pi.N.8.17
; σ. θεῷ εἰρημένον spoken as by inspiration, Hdt.1.86; σ. θεῷ δ' εἰρήσεται Ar.Pl. 114
; σ. θεῷ εἰπεῖν Pl.Tht. 151b
, Prt. 317b; ξ. θεοῖς Th.1.86
; so σ. δαίμονι, σ. Ἀθήνῃ καὶ Διί, Il.11.792, 20.192; σ. Χαρίτεσσιν Pi.N.9.54
, cf. P.9.2; ξ. τῷ θεῷ πᾶς καὶ γελᾷ κὠδύρεται S.Aj. 383
; also θεοῦ σ. παλάμᾳ, σ. θεοῦ τύχᾳ, Pi.O.10(11).21, N.6.24: generally, of personal cooperation, σ. σοὶ φραζέσθω let him consult with you, Il.9.346; λοχησάμενος σ. ἑταίρῳ Od.13.268
; ξ. τῇ βουλῇ in consultation with the Council, IG12.63.17; σ. τινὶ μάχεσθαι fight at his side, X.Cyr.5.3.5, cf. HG4.1.34; σ. τινὶ εἶναι or γίγνεσθαι to be with another, i.e.on his side, of his party, Id.An.3.1.21, Smp.5.10; οἱ σ. αὐτῷ his friends, followers, Id.An.1.2.15, cf. Act.Ap.14.4, etc.

3 furnished with, endued with, σ. μεγάλῃ ἀρετῇ ἐκτήσω ἄκοιτιν Od.24.193
; πόλιν θεοδμάτῳ σ. ἐλευθερίᾳ ἔκτισσε Pi.P.1.61
.

4 of things that belong, or are attached, to a person, σ. νηΐ or σ. νηυσί, i.e. on board ship, Il.1.389, 179, etc.; σ. νηυσὶν ἀλαπάξαι, opp. πεζός, 9.328 (so in Prose, σ. ναυσὶ προσπλεῖν X.HG2.2.7
, etc.); σ. ἵπποισιν καὶ ὄχεσφιν Il.5.219
; esp. of arms, μιν κατέκηε σ. ἔντεσι 6.418
; στῆ δ' εὐρὰξ σ. δουρί 15.541
; ἀντιβίην or ἀντίβιον σ. ἔντεσι or σ. τεύχεσι πειρηθῆναι, 5.220, 11.386; σ. ἔντεσι μάρνασθαι 13.719
; σκῆπτρον, σ. τῷ ἔβη 2.47
; ἄγγελος ἦλθε.. σ. ἀγγελίῃ ib. 787; ς. (or ξ.) ὅπλοις Th.2.2
, al., Pl.Lg. 947c, Aen.Tact.17.1; ς. (or ξ.) τοῖς ὅπλοις Th.2.90
, 4.14, Hell.Oxy. 10.1, Pl.Lg. 763a, Aen.Tact.11.8; σ. ἐγχειριδίοις Hell.Oxy.10.2
; ξ. ξιφιδίῳ καὶ θώρακι Th.3.22
; ξ. ἑνὶ ἱματίῳ Id.2.70
; in some such cases ς. is little more than expletive, as σ. τεύχεσι θωρηχθέντες ll.8.530, etc.: with αὐτός (cf. αὐτός 1.5
), chiefly in Hom., ἀνόρουσεν αὐτῇ σ. φόρμιγγι Il.9.194
, cf. 14.498; αὐτῷ σ. τε λίνῳ καὶ ῥήγεϊ Od.13.118
.

5 of things accompanying, or of concurrent circumstances, ἄνεμος σ. λαίλαπι Il.17.57
, cf. Od.12.408; of coincidence in time, ἄκρᾳ σ. ἑσπέρᾳ Pi.P.11.10
; καιρῷ σ. ἀτρεκεῖ ib.8.7; σ. τῷ Χρόνῳ προϊόντι X.Cyr.8.7.6
; in the course of, κείνῳ σ. ἄματι B.10.23
, cf. 125, Pi.Fr. 123.

6 of necessary connexion or consequence, σὺν μεγάλῳ ἀποτεῖσαι to pay with a great loss, i.e. suffer greatly, Il.4.161; δημοσίῳ σ. κακῷ with loss to the public, Thgn.50; σ. τῷ σῷ ἀγαθῷ to your advantage, X.Cyr.3.1.15; ὤλοντο.. σὺν μιάς ματι with pollution, S.Ant. 172; to denote agreement, in accordance with, σ. τῷ δικαίῳ καὶ καλῷ X.An.2.6.18
; σ. δίκᾳ Pi.P.9.96
; σ. κόσμῳ Hdt.8.86
, Arist.Mu. 398b23; σ. τάχει S.El. 872
, etc.

7 of the instrument or means, with the help of, by means of, σ. ἐλαίῳ φαρμακώσαισα Pi.P.4.221
; διήλλαχθε σ. σιδάρῳ A.Th. 885
(lyr.); πλοῦτον ἐκτήσω ξ. αἰχμῇ Id.Pers. 755
(troch.); ἡ [τῶν φίλων] κτῆσίς ἐστιν οὐδαμῶς σ. τῇ βίᾳ X.Cyr.8.7.13
; ξ. ἐπαίνῳ Th.1.84
.

8 including, κεφάλαιον σ. ἐπωνίοις IG12.329.5
, cf. 22.1388.85, 1407.12, al.; τοῦ Πειραιῶς ξ. Μουνυχίᾳ Th.2.13
, cf. 4.124, 5.26, 74, 7.42, 8.90, 95; δισχίλιαι γάρ εἰσι (sc. δραχμαὶ) σ. ταῖς Νικίου Ar.Fr. 100
; ἀνήλωσα σ. τῇ τῆς σκευῆς ἀναθέσει ἑκκαίδεκα μνᾶς Lys.21.4
, cf. 2; αἶγας ἀπέδοτο σ. τῷ αἰπόλῳ τριῶν καὶ δέκα μνῶν Is.6.33
, cf. 8.8,35, 11.42,46, Aeschin. 2.162, D.19.155, 27.23,al., Arist.HA 525b15,17, Ath.19.6, Hipparch. 1.1.9, al., PSI10.1124.14 (ii A.D.).

9 excluding, apart from, plus, ἓξ ἐμοὶ σ. ἑβδόμῳ six with (but not including) me the seventh, A. Th. 283; αἱ γὰρ καμπαὶ τέτταρες, ἢ δύο σ. τοῖς πτερυγίοις Arist.HA 490a32
; σ. τοῖς ἀρχαίοις τὸν οἶκον ἐκ τῶν προσόδων μείζω ποιῆσαι D. 27.61
;
τὴν ἐφαπτίδα σ. τῇ σακκοπήρᾳ ἐν ᾗ ἐνῆν
together with.., PEnteux.32.7
, cf. 89.9 (iii B.C.); οἱ γραμματεῖς σ. τοῖς πρεσβυτέροις Ev.Luc.20.1
, cf. Ep.Gal.5.24.

B POSITION:— σύν sts. follows its case, Il.10.19, Od.9.332, 15.410. It freq. stands between Adj. and Subst., as Od.11.359, Il.9.194, etc.; more rarely between Subst. and Adj., Od.13.258, Pi.P. 8.7.

2 freq. in tmesis in Hom., as Il.23.687, Od.14.296, etc.

3 in late Gr. σὺν καὶ c. dat., στεφανηφορήσας σ. καὶ Αὐρ. Ἰάσονι IG12(7).259
(Amorgos, iii A.D.), cf. Supp.Epigr.4.535 (Ephesus, ii/iii A.D.), Rev.Phil.50.11 (Sardis, i/iii A.D.), CPR26.16 (ii A.D.); cf. infr. c. 2.

C σύν AS ADV., together, at once, κενεὰς σ. Χεῖρας ἔχοντες Od.10.42
; mostly folld. by δέ or τε, σ. δὲ πτερὰ πυκνὰ λίασθεν Il.23.879
; σ. τε δύ' ἐρχομένω 10.224
(cf. σύνδυο) ; ξ. τε διπλοῖ βασιλῆς S.Aj. 960
(lyr.). It is sts. hard to distinguish this from tmesis, e.g. in Il.23.879; so ξὺν κακῶς ποιεῖν is = Ξυγκακοποιεῖν in Th.3.13. In Old Testament Gr. it is sts. used to translate the Hebr. 'ēth (particle prefixed to the definite accus.) through confusion with the Prep. 'ēth 'with', ἐμίσησα σὺν τὴν ζωήν LXXEc.2.17
; οὐκ ἐμνήσθη σ. τοῦ ἀνδρός ib.9.15; ἔκτισεν ὁ θεὸς σὺν τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ σὺν τὴν γῆν Aq.Ge.1.1
, etc.

2 besides, also, σ. δὲ πλουτίζειν ἐμέ A.Ag. 586
; σ. δ' αὔτως ἐγώ S.Ant. 85
, etc.; σ. δ' ἐγὼ παρών Id.Aj. 1288
, cf. El. 299; Δίρκα τε.. σ. τ' Ἀσωπιάδες κόραι E.HF 785
(lyr.); in later Poetry σ. καί A.R.1.74
, Herod.4.3, Nic.Th.8, D.P.843 (also in late Prose, Ath.2.49a; cf. supr. B. 3).

D IN COMPOS.

I with, along with, together, at the same time, hence of any kind of union, connexion, or participation in a thing, and metaph. of agreement or unity. In Compos. with a trans. Verb σύν may refer to the Object as well as the Subject, as συγκατακτείνειν may mean kill one person as well as another, or, join with another in killing.

2 of the completion of an action, altogether, completely, as in συνάγνυμι, συνασκέω 2
, συνθρύπτω, συγκόπτω, συμπατέω, συμπληρόω, συντελέω, συντέμνω; sts., therefore, it seems only to strengthen the force of the simple word.

3 joined with numerals, σύνδυο two together, which sense often becomes distributive, by twos, two and two; so σύντρεις, σύμπεντε, etc., like Lat. bini, terni, etc.

II σύν in Compos., before β μ π φ ψ, becomes συμ-; before γ κ ξ Χ, συγ-; before λ συλ-; before ς usu. συς-; but becomes συ- before ς followed by a conson. (e.g. συστῆναι), before ζ, and perh. sts. before ξ. In a poet. passage, ap.Pl.Phdr. 237a, we have ξύμ alone in tmesi, ξύμ μοι λάβεσθε for συλλάβεσθέ μοι; cf. ὅτε ξὺμ πρῶτ' ἐφύοντο Emp.95
: in Inscrr. and Papyri these assimilations are freq. not found.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > σύν
19 διαβαίνω

δια - βαίνω, inf. διαβαινέμεν, aor. 2 διέβην, inf. διαβήμεναι, part. διαβάς: step apart (of the position of the legs, see βαίνω); εὖ διαβάς, ‘planting himself firmly,’ Il. 12.458; go through, cross, τάφρον, Il. 12.50; εἰς Ἤλιδα, Od. 4.635.

A Homeric dictionary (Greek-English) (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ομηρικό λεξικό) > διαβαίνω
20 ἷστός

ἷστός ( ἵστημι): anything that stands. — (1) mast, in the middle of the ship, held in place by the μεσόδμη, ἱστοπέδη, πρότονοι, ἐπίτονοι. During stay in port the mast was unstepped and laid back upon the ἱστοδόκη (cf. preceding cut, and Nos. 60, 84).— (2) weaver's beam, loom. The frame of the loom was not placed, as in modern handlooms, in a horizontal position, but stood upright, as appears in the cut, representing an ancient Egyptian loom. The threads of the warp hung perpendicularly down, and were drawn tight by weights at their lower ends. To set up the beam and so begin the web is ( ἱστὸν) στήσασθαι. In weaving, the weaver passed from one side to the other before the loom ( ἐποίχεσθαι), as he carried the shuttle ( κανών), on which was wound the thread of the woof, through the warp, and then drove the woof home with a blow of the κερκίς.— (3) warp, and in general, web, woven stuff.

A Homeric dictionary (Greek-English) (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ομηρικό λεξικό) > ἷστός

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

Position error — is one of the errors affecting the systems in an aircraft for measuring airspeed and altitude. [Kermode, A.C., Mechanics of Flight , 10th Edition – page 65] [”Of these errors the error in detection of static pressure is generally the most serious … Wikipedia
Position-effect variegation — is a variegation caused by the inactivation of a gene in some cells through its abnormal juxtaposition with heterochromatin.The classical example is the Drosophila w [m4] (speak white mottled 4) translocation. In this mutation, an inversion on… … Wikipedia
Through arch bridge — Sydney Harbour Bridge, arguably the most famous of this type Ancestor Truss arch bridge Related None(see Suspension bridge) … Wikipedia
through — ► PREPOSITION & ADVERB 1) moving in one side and out of the other side of (an opening or location). 2) so as to make a hole or passage in. 3) (preposition ) expressing the position or location of something beyond (an opening or an obstacle). 4)… … English terms dictionary
Position (team sports) — Position in team sports refers to the joint arrangement of a team on its field of play during a game and to the standardized place of any individual player in that arrangement. Much instruction, strategy, and reporting is organized by a set of… … Wikipedia
Position paper — A caca poo poo pokkieis an essay that presents an opinion about an issue, typically that of the author or another specified entity. Position papers range from the simplest format of a letter to the editor through to the most complex in the form… … Wikipedia
Position-independent code — In computing, position independent code (PIC) or position independent executable (PIE) is machine instruction code that executes properly regardless of where in memory it resides. PIC is commonly used for shared libraries, so that the same… … Wikipedia
Position line — A position line is a line that can be identified both on a nautical chart or aeronautical chart and by observation out on the surface of the earth. The intersection of two position lines is a fix that used in position fixing to identify the… … Wikipedia
Through the Fire and Flames — Infobox Single Name=Through the Fire and Flames Artist=DragonForce from Album=Inhuman Rampage B side= Released=August 3, 2006 Format=Compact disc Recorded= Genre=Power metal Length=7:21 (Album Version) 4:59 (Edit) Label=Sanctuary (UK) Roadrunner… … Wikipedia
Position vector — A position, location or radius vector is a vector which represents the position of an object in space in relation to an arbitrary reference point. The concept applies to two or three dimensional space.Keller, F. J, Gettys, W. E. et al. (1993),… … Wikipedia
Position der Erde im Universum — Die Position der Erde im Universum ist uns heute relativ detailliert bekannt, was auf die Fortschritte der praktischen wie theoretischen Astronomie in den letzten 400 Jahren und besonders im vergangenen Jahrhundert zurückzuführen ist.… … Deutsch Wikipedia

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: с греческого на английский

through+position

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: с греческого на английский

through+position

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка: